JP6704217B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a so-called ball-type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko gaming machine”) and a so-called rotating gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachislot gaming machine”).

In the conventional gaming machine, in addition to the game control board that controls the game operation, an effect control board that controls the effect operation is mounted (for example, see Patent Document 1). As such an effect control board, in addition to a so-called character ROM in which material image data used for displaying an image is stored in advance, a primary storage unit for temporarily storing material image data in advance, Also, there is a device having VDP as a graphic chip. For this VDP, for example, a certain number of material image data such as for changing or big hit is taken in advance from the character ROM to the primary storage unit at the timing of turning on the power or changing the game state. ing.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-192783

By the way, in order to cover the low read speed of the character ROM, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the primary storage unit, which has a high read speed. Material image data is required, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the primary ROM as well as the storage capacity of the character ROM.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to reduce visual discomfort even when a storage unit having a low read speed is used as the character ROM while suppressing the storage capacity of the primary storage unit.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention comprises a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a production control means for controlling a production device for displaying an image according to an instruction from the game control means, The effect control means stores constant storage means in which material image data forming the display surface of the image is stored in advance, and first effect control data for controlling display of the image in accordance with an instruction from the game control means. Effect control data selection means for selecting, temporary storage means for temporarily storing material image data in display surface units based on the first effect control data among the material image data, the constant storage means or the temporary A display surface image storage means for storing the material image data read out from the storage means as image data to be displayed on the effect device , and one display for the display surface unit order in which the material image data stored in the temporary storage means is previously stored. Image display control means for reading out the surface portion, storing in the display surface image storage means as image data to be displayed on the rendering device, and outputting the image data stored in the display surface image storage means to the rendering device, and a predetermined display surface. reads the amount of raw image data from the always-storage means, while for relocation in the temporary storage means in a predetermined arrangement manner, the rearranged array of raw image data in the first performance control data and the temporary storage means Reconstructing means for constructing second effect control data based on the aspect , wherein the image display control means stores the display surface image based on the second effect control data constructed by the reconstructing means. Storing the image data to be displayed on the rendering device in the means, and outputting the image data to the rendering device in the next display surface unit in which the image data to be displayed on the rendering device is stored in the display surface image storage means. Characteristic gaming machine.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the visual discomfort while suppressing the storage capacity of the primary storage unit and employing a storage unit having a low read speed as the character ROM.
3

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a plan view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine seen from the front while the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko gaming machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko game machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from behind. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is viewed from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the installation base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the production|operation operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which saw the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right production unit of FIG.34(b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right door production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the lower right door effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing rearward. (A) is a perspective view from the front of the dish unit with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is from the rear with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removing unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removing unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the upper front side, and (b) is a perspective view as seen from the lower front side. It is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the payout device from the back side. It is a right view of a dispensing device. (A) is a perspective view at the time of non-ball removal seen from the front side of the payout device which cut|disconnected the prize ball table box along the XX line of FIG. 50, (b) is a perspective view at the time of ball removal. is there. (A) is a perspective view at the time of non-ball removal seen from the back side of the payout device which cut|disconnected the prize ball back box along the YY line of FIG. 50, (b) is a perspective view at the time of ball removal. is there. 50A is a front view of the payout device in which the prize ball cover box is cut along the line X-X in FIG. 50 when the ball is removed, and FIG. 50B is a prize ball along the line Y-Y in FIG. It is a rear view at the time of non-ball removal of the dispensing device which cut the back box. It is an explanatory view of maintenance of a payment device. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the pachinko game machine with which the game board was attached to the main body frame. It is a front view showing an example of composition of a game board. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a payout control board and the like. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 57, a board connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor of a payout device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition around a touch panel controller and a touch sensor. It is a block diagram such as a memory map showing a configuration example of a prescribed storage area of the liquid crystal and the sound ROM. It is a figure showing an example of composition of model information data prepared beforehand in a model information data field. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 70 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 69 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 75. FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 76. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pay-out ball gaze operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze operation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of the payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from the CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special design and special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game mode decision processing. It is an example of a table used in the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example regarding delay control. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a write capture control process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of a response with respect to operation of a player on the assumption of implementing delay control. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the response with respect to operation of a player on the assumption of implementing delay control. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing request list corresponding to each frame regarding a drawing request of each frame when a certain scene is reproduced. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing process by the graphic chip of a general frame buffer system. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing process by this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a behavior of a movable decoration body.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko gaming machine 1 as a gaming machine that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. The door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled into an outer frame and was seen from back.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on a pachinko island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame. A main body frame 4 that supports the openable and closable body 3 and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player is provided.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 and the like, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated from each other and extend laterally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which connect both ends of the member 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in a front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A side unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game that is attached to the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a dish unit that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that has been hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower plate 202 of the 200, a ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 680, and a door frame base unit. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 100 to close the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. Of the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in a front view, respectively, and are rotatably attached to the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door of the door frame 3. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the frame side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body frame base. A ball launching device 680, which is attached to the lower front part of the game machine 600 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a body frame, which are attached to the right side surface of the body frame base when viewed from the front. 4, and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the vehicle.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a pachinko island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 is viewed from the front left direction. It is attached to the rear surface of the tank rail 803 having two ball guide passages extending to the left and right and leading to the left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner 2 A ball guiding unit 920 having a strip ball guiding passage, and a ball guiding unit 920 which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 below the ball guiding unit 920 and guided by the two ball guiding passages of the ball guiding unit 920. A payout device 830 for paying out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 4110 housed in the payout control board box 950, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830. The upper full tank ball path unit 850 that guides the game ball downward and discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the payout. A normal guiding path and a full tank which is attached to the lower end of the unit base 801 and guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guiding path for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the front and guiding it from the front end to the full tank ball receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 is provided. In addition, in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit 920, a ball break switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball is provided.

Further, the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a ball discharge passage 865 for discharging the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , A lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The game balls in the ball tank 802 flow into the payout device 830 through the tank rail 803 having two ball guiding passages and the ball guiding unit 920 having two ball guiding passages. When paying out the game balls that have flowed into the payout device 830 in Article 2 as prize balls, the game balls that have flowed in in Article 2 are paid out one by one to flow into the upper full tank ball route unit 850, When removing the game ball that has flowed into the payout device 830 in Article 2 from the payout device 830, let the game ball that has flowed in in Article 2 be one Article and let it pass through the ball discharge passage 865 and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. (The game balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are supplied to a ball lifting device installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown)). As described above, the payout device 830 according to the present embodiment also has a function of two-row, one-row conversion.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing the power supply board 931 therein, and the speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the power supply board box 930. An interface control board box 940 in which a control board is housed, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board 4110 that is mounted across the interface control board box 940 and that controls the payout of gaming balls inside And a substrate box 950.

The payout control board 4110 is provided with an operation switch 952 that also has various functions, an error LED display 953 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The operation portion of the operation switch 952 is exposed from the payout control board box 950, and is operated by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall. On the other hand, the error LED indicator 953 is not exposed from the payout control board box 950. A clerk such as a clerk in the game hall can visually check the contents displayed on the error LED display 953 through a transparent cover body that constitutes the payout control board box 950.

The operation switch 952 is a microprocessor built into the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 when the power is turned on, and a microprocessor of a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the game stored in the main control board box provided in the game board 5. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM, or to clear the error when the error LED indicator 953 notifies the error after the power is turned on. It has a function of clearing the RAM when the power is turned on and a function of clearing the error after the power is turned on (after the period for which the function as the RAM clear is achieved has elapsed).

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 in the game areas 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding the upper portion, a flat-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and the rear side of the game panel 1100. A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the board and opened upward, and a main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 are housed inside. A main control board box 1300, and a table unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes which are mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and which can receive game balls hit in the game area 5a. , A back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the substrate holder 1200 and can be seen from the player side through the game panel 1100.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the ball lever 680 to generate a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 has a rectangular outer shape in a front view and is frame-shaped, a door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 500 is attached so as to penetrate the dish unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that has a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A cylindrical handle attachment member 120 for attaching the handle unit 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. And a door frame side rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 and the lower hinge member 640 of the body frame, which are attached to the upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcement unit 130 in a front view and project forward. An upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit attachment member 160 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560 are provided. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is vertically arranged in rows and bulges forward, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are capable of storing game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And a plate-shaped plate unit base 210 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 mounted on the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image. A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate production button 257 that can be operated by a player, a plate unit cover 260 for covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the front plate 201 on the front view. A lower door right effect unit 270 that has a lower door right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, a transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right door effect unit 270 from the front side, and an upper plate An upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in 201 to the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball removing unit 320 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and a game hall. The ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of No. And a main dish top decorative member 340 capable of emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A front decorative member 370 having a translucent property, which is attached to the center of the left and right sides of the front surface of the 360 and bulges forward, and a top speaker which is installed in the top decorative member 370 and outputs a sound in a high range ( (Not shown), and a door frame upper decorative substrate 380 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3, a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) attached to the upper left corner of the unit 3, and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decoration member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame in front of the right side decoration member 470. 3, a right speaker unit 246 having a right speaker (not shown) attached to a position that is the upper right corner of the unit 3, and a plurality of LEDs on the front face, which are attached between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470. And a door frame right decoration board (not shown) to which is attached.

The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502, as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And are equipped with. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and a handle operation sensor for detecting a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and a handle unit attached to the handle body 502 to be operated by a player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor that is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side, and a unit main body 522. It mainly includes a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. 526, a full tank ball receiving port 528 that is open rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front, and is capable of communicating with the full tank guiding path of the lower tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, A foul that receives a game ball (fal ball) that has been opened upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front and that has not been reached in the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the front full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 which are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharge the game ball received in the lower plate ball supplying port of the plate unit 200. 210c, and a sphere discharge port 532 that communicates with 210c.

As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and the rear side is opened. A unit cover 544 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side in a front view of the foul cover unit 520 with the front side open, and the upper plate of the dish unit 200 that opens to the front. A ball entrance 546 into which the game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball discharge port 548 that is capable of discharging the game ball entering the ball entrance 546 and is open rearward, and a ball entrance A game ball that has entered into 546 can be discharged, and a ball discharge port 550 that is open to the front below the ball entrance 546 is provided. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 is a ball feed solenoid for releasing the game balls entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball exit 548 and a game ball entered from the ball entrance 546. A switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped unit frame 562 which is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. A pair of glass plates 564 that closes the inside of the cage unit frame 562 are provided.

[2-1. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 21 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from below. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the performance operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

In addition, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit that is disassembled and viewed from below. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged area of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is an effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a unit.

Further, FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door rendering unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from behind. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 34(b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the lower-right door rotating body of the lower-right-door effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the lower-right door rotating body facing rearward.

Also, FIG. 43(a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper dish ball removing unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43(b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 46A is a perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit as disassembled and seen from the front.

The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. This dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 which stores a game ball that is dispensed from the dispensing device 830 and is driven into the game area 5a, and a game which is arranged below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the flat plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit base 210, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges forward to a large extent. And a lower plate body 214 that is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and that bulges significantly forward and forms the lower plate 202. ..

Further, the dish unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper dish body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, the upper dish body 212, the lower dish body 214, and the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit. Dish unit cover 260 that is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210, lower right door production unit 270 that is disposed on the right side of the production operation unit 220 and that is attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and lower right door production unit Performance unit cover 300 that covers the front side of 270 and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210, and game balls that are attached so as to sandwich the dish unit base 210 from the front and back and are stored in the upper dish 201 of the upper dish body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for extracting the lower plate 202 and lower plate ball removing unit for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, which are attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214. And 320.

Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine that is arranged adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. , The upper plate top decoration member 340 which is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and is capable of emitting light, and the rear of the dish unit cover 260, which is attached to the front left side of the dish unit base 210, emits light toward the front. The dish unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of illuminatable LEDs and the rear of the rendering unit cover 300 and the lower right of the rendering unit 270 of the door are mounted on the right side of the front of the dish unit base 210 and forward. A dish unit right decorative substrate 346 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward it, a plate front decorative substrate 233 and a plate rear decorative substrate 235, which are mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 210 and will be described later. Upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, production button decoration substrate 251, production button pressing sensor 258, door lower right relay board 281, dish unit left decoration substrate 345, dish unit right decoration substrate 346 and game board 5 and a dish unit relay board 347 that relays the connection with a peripheral control board (not shown).

[2-1a. Plate unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 210a extending cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 210a. And a speaker slit 210b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending up and down, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward at the lower center of the left and right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided, which penetrates the ball supply port 210c on the upper right side in a front view in the front-rear direction, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a rectangular inner circumference that penetrates forward and backward on the left side of the upper dish ball sending port 210d in a front view, and a receiving part that projects forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape opening 210g that penetrates the upper bowl ball feed port 210d in the front right direction in the front view, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates the front frame in the lower right corner in the front view are inserted. A handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and which penetrates in the vicinity of the right corner in a front view, and a right side in a front view of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c. And a cutout portion 210j that is cut out from the rear end to the front side.

[2-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right as viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward and backward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in front view and through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper plate body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the delivery port 210d.

Further, the upper plate body 212 includes a metal ground metal fitting 212b extending from the center on the left and right to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the earth metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and by contacting the game ball, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

[2-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower plate body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a trapezoidal plan view in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The lower dish main body 214 has a ball-draining hole 214a that penetrates the bottom face vertically and can be closed by the lower plate ball-draining unit 320. is doing. This lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and also downwardly move the game balls to the lower side of the plate unit 200 from the ball hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[2-1d. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the left and right when viewed from the front. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in front view.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference at the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A or the dish unit base 210 side, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A or the dish unit base 210 side.

[2-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 26, the mounting base unit 220A of the performance operation unit 220 is a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has an open top. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 that is attached and has its rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and is capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the front plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231, and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover for covering the front side of the front plate front lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231, and has an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper side of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235. Is placed on the unit cover 224 and is attached to the unit cover 224. The rear plate decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the rear plate decorative member 236. Linear light emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light of the above to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in front view, and a button mounting member. And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by the 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined from the front and rear substantially in the center toward the front, and a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated left and right. One through-hole 230b and a tubular receiving portion 230c that extends downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a quadrangular inner circumference. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow as it goes downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to, it extends so as to be directed forward. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is open upward and accommodates the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 is spaced apart from the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view at the left and right, respectively, and protrudes upward in pairs in a cylindrical shape. A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that are laterally spaced apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and project upward in a cylindrical shape, and from the center of the housing recess 231a on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface. It has a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e protruding in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a toward the lower side and separated from each other to the left and right. ..

In addition, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface, which penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends left and right on the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and is recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. And a notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle that extends left and right and a trapezoid that protrudes outward from both left and right sides of the quadrangle. Further, in the accommodation recess 231a, the bottom surfaces of the quadrangular portions are formed lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step difference on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i on the upper end side, the diameter of which becomes smaller toward the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231b has the same distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i as the length of the damper 222, and is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d projects to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a, and a rear outer peripheral wall inclining forward as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. And has been extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that their lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through hole 230b of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decoration member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for making the post-upper plate decorating member 236 emit light and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. ..

The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate post-decoration member 236, and is disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235, and a light-receiving unit 237a. And a linear light emitting portion 237b in a flat plate shape which is continuous with and is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237b forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light receiving portion 237a, and guides the light received at the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b to guide the light from the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire top can be illuminated (in a line).

The upper bowl ball removal button 239 is provided with a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the receiving protrusion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the attachment-side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the force from the projecting portion 231e (unit case 231) side from being dispersed, and to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, making it difficult for the mounting base 230 to be damaged. ..

[2-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, and an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above. Inside the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper side. Of the shallow box-shaped base member 243, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 which is inserted into the base member 243 from the upper side and is capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer circumference, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above and through the base member 243. And a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to 240.

In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over the entire left and right sides of the rear end surface of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 is provided. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 231a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending left and right, a flat plate-shaped projecting portion 240b projecting trapezoidally from both left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and each projecting portion 240b having an outer diameter of the damper 222. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting part 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is disposed near the board mounting part 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting part 240b.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. In addition, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c and over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration driving motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from the upper side, and extending parts 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c is formed at the lower end of the screw hole 243c, the screw hole 243c penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extending portion 243b, and the upper side having a large spot facing. And a C-chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip side of the taper portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed so that it cannot pass through.

The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is resistant to shock and is hard to break, a transparent capacitive sensor sheet 246b provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover 246c that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. Is equipped with.

In the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 can be attached by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the lower case 240. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 moves downward from the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Project.

In the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can independently generate vibration.

In addition, the touch unit 220B can view the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from above. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 like operating the button of the image.

Further, since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B, when the liquid such as drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of the liquid.

[2-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a bottom of the unit main body 250. The effect button decoration substrate 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and the substrate cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decoration substrate 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and has a cylindrical button base 253 that is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from the upper side to the upper side. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-shaped diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And a production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , A pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf portion 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate the through hole 250c of the unit body 250 and that projects outward from the lower end and that can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. And a pair of engaging claws 253c having an outer peripheral surface of the upper tubular portion 253b, which are radially shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end and radially outwardly protrude, and the lower end of which can abut the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the body 255a to the lower end of the lower cylinder 253a of the button base 253, and a disc-shaped body 255a fitted on the upper cylinder 253b of the button base 253. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and light from the LEDs can be guided and emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

In this button unit 220C, a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and an upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claw portions 253c of the button base 253 has the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further upward movement is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the upper end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258, and The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by making the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

[2-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is such that the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. Since it also projects downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and move upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

Also, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the case. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is mounted from the upper side in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the pyramidal cylinder which is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed as a strip. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting unit 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and the touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted, whereby the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player contacting the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, it is possible to make the player feel as if he/she is operating an actual operation button despite operating the image operation button. It is possible to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, the player is caused to press the upper plate production button 257 in accordance with the game state, and the upper plate production button 257 is operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, since the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only touch the touch panel 246, they may lack a sense of operation compared to the actual operation buttons, but the upper plate effect button 257 should be actually pressed. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably entertain the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving an uncomfortable feeling to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged in a region where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward, the game is performed even during an effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is struck or a shock (load) is applied from above, the left and right lateral support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted damper 222, and the touch unit 220B descends while the damper 222 is being lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. As a result, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b but also by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B descends, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that its center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a descend. When the projecting portion 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B ejects from the touch unit 220B. The shock is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are formed in a pyramidal shape that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving protrusion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the shock applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted by the mounting base 230, the shocks applied to the touch unit 220B are sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like are less likely to be damaged by the impact.

In addition, the effect operation unit 220, the linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge of the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral edge LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, depending on the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 emits light to the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch unit 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b). Can be made By illuminating and decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate, the player's interest is attracted to the performance operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, like the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the plate unit cover 260, which will be described later. Is disposed at a position higher than the upper surface of the touch unit 220B, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Accordingly, in the upper plate 201, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). It is possible to prevent dew condensation water from entering the touch unit 220B, and prevent troubles in the touch unit 220B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

[2-1e. Plate unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends in the left-right direction, and the center of the left-right side bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 that is open to the front substantially at the center of the left and right and has a rear end closed by the plate unit base 210, and the top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. Which is formed on the left side of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the upper plate body 212 and the lower side of the effect operation unit 220 and the lower plate opening 261 when viewed from the front, and the bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a plate unit left decorative member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and decorated with light by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view. The handle opening 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, the bottom plate portion 266 that forms the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 and covers the lower side of the lower dish body 214, and the bottom plate at the center of the left and right sides. And a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 vertically and is closed by the lower dish ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate opening 261 is closed by the bottom plate body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decoration member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, whereas it has a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side of the front view has a translucency as a whole.

The plate unit cover 260 is formed in a state where it can be grasped with one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 when assembled in the plate unit 200. Accordingly, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, it is possible to stabilize the finger (hand or arm) to be touched, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B. Can be done easily.

[2-1f. Right lower door production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the lower right door effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical lower right rotating body 270A for light emission decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 and a unit base 271 that is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right door rotator 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to a rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a driven gear. And a shaft member 275 attached to the unit base 271 for rotatably supporting the gear 274.

Further, the lower door right effect unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotating body side bearing member 276 rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the lower right door. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotator 270A on the side opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotator 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting a position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the front left side of the lower right door 270A of the door, and a rear member attached to the front side of the unit base 271. A door lower right base decoration board 280 having a plurality of LEDs, a door lower right drive motor 272 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door described later. A lower right relay board 281 for relaying the connection between the lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) is provided.

The lower right door rotary body 270A constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 each having a hemispherical shell shape, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And a rotary body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are each formed with semicircular cutouts 285a, 286a around the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 is a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, and has a belt-like decoration 285b that has a metallic luster and extends in a belt-like shape in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape that is arranged in the center of the belt-like decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b that has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on the surface of a translucent hemispherical shell. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the belt decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the belt decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first fixed shaft member 292, which has a cylindrical shape and which is attached to the right lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 and extends vertically to the surface of the base plate 291 and whose front end is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and has its tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. Second fixed shaft member 293 of FIG. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord that connects the lower right door relay board 281 and the lower right door rotary body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

The rotary body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the insides of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, and is a flat plate-shaped transparent reflector base 294. The first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is annular and opens outward in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the inside of the ring of the first reflector 295 and has a hexagonal shape at the center. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having metallic luster on their surfaces, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. In addition, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

In this rotary body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Separated from each other for relative rotation.

The unit base 271 is a flat plate-shaped member that is disposed in the rear of the lower right door 270A and has an annular ring portion 271a and the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b, the second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which a U-shaped recess is formed rearward from the front end and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the driving gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a mounted on the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b projecting from the mounting portion 275a in a tubular shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door 270A in between. The two rotation detection sensors 275 are a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42(a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rear (FIG. 42(b)). Can be detected respectively.

The lower right door production unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door driving motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Whether or not a chance is coming can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Further, in the lower right door production unit 270, since the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the lower right door rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached, the right door rotating body 270A is rotated while the lower right door rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decoration substrate 291 (the LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and at the same time, the first reflector 295 and the Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, even if the LED of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 does not blink, the lower right door rotating body 270A emits light as if the light was blinking. By irradiating light of various colors from the LEDs, the lower right door 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, which can entertain the player.

[2-1 g. Performance unit cover]
As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the rendering unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower door right rotating body 270A in the lower right door producing unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 in front view, and the lower right portion of the rotating body cover portion 301, which penetrates in the front-rear direction, is locked by the locking unit 700. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container with the entire rear open, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover section 301 is light-emitted and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is a dish unit right decorative board 346. Decorated with light.

[2-1h. Upper plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at a position that is located at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and that is rotated by pressing the upper bowl ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member. And a first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate ball removing button 239 in the upward direction.

Further, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feed opening 210d from the rear side of the dish unit base 210, and a rear base member. 315 and the dish unit base 210, and is mounted by the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and the upper dish ball removing slider 316 in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side, and the upper dish ball removing And a second spring member 317 that biases the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a that is attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extension portions that extend forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a in a flat plate shape. The projecting piece 312b, the shaft supporting part 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extending part 312b, and the bottom end of the front surface of the base part 312a are provided near the rear end of the first spring member 314. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The pressing force transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft supporting portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extending plate-shaped rearward extending from the shaft portion 313a. An upward extending piece 313c that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearward extending piece 313b, and the lower end of the extending piece 239a of the upper dish ball pulling button 239 can abut. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side near the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extension piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and the lower end thereof is capable of contacting the upper dish ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and the front plate of the base portion 315a so as to be laterally separated from each other. The slider support portion 315b slidably supporting both left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316, and the front end is opened at a position corresponding to the upper part of the upper plate ball feed port 210d of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base part 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward from the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward, and a first guide path 315d. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guide path 315d, then extends leftward in front view, is open at the left end to the left, and is open rearward as a whole; A plate-shaped passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the leftward extending portion of the guide passage 315e and the base portion 315a in the front-back direction so that two sides are surrounded by the L-shaped second guide passage 315e. An opening 315g penetrating therethrough and a spring locking portion 315h protruding forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked are provided.

The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and is connected to the second guide path 315e. The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper dish ball removing slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider supporting portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front side in the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. The transmission piece 316b, which extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313, and the slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that projects rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring member that projects from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locks the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

In the upper dish ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate body 212 in the front view when the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper dish ball pulling button 239 is pressed downward, the upper dish ball punching unit 310 causes the pressing transmission member 313 to resist the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extending piece 239 a of the upper dish ball punching button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing force transmitting member 313, the transmitting piece 316b of the upper dish ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d is in contact causes the upper dish ball to be removed. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

When the upper bowl ball removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting section 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, and the first guide path. The 315d side is in communication with the second taxiway 315e side. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

It should be noted that when the downward pressing of the upper plate ball removing button 239 is released, the upper plate ball removing slider 316 and the upper plate ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. You can return to the original state.

[2-1i. Lower plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and is a ball of the lower plate body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a that coincides with the hole 214a, and a flat plate-like slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower dish ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. And a knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324 are provided.

The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right side from the center in the left and right in a front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removing base 321 to the lower dish body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported from side to side between the lower dish ball removing base 321 and the lower dish body 214. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b that can open and close from the main body 325a and can hold the holding projection 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325b and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b closes and holds the holding projection 322a, and at the same time, holds the pair of holdings. The pawl 325b is maintained in the closed state. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325b is opened and the holding projection 322a is released.

In the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right when viewed from the front. Positioned, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be stored in the lower plate 202 without coming out from the ball hole 214a downward.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out to the lower side of the plate unit 200 through the ball removing hole 214a and the opening 321a, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projections 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b and release the holding projection 322a, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. In this way, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 or remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[2-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 has a translucent unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end in front view, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and that can be operated by the player, A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided. A CR unit lamp is arranged near the display unit 334, and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp can be visually recognized from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331.

This ball lending operation unit 330, when inserting a cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then pressing a ball lending button 332, dishes a predetermined number of game balls. The unit 200 can be rented (dispensed) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the cash that has been lent and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the rented amount. Further, the display unit 334 displays cash or the number of prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine fails, or the like.

[2-1k. Upper plate top decorative material]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate top decoration member 340 of the plate unit 200 is a light-transmitting upper plate top lens that is attached to the center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 in the left-right center and extends in the left and right bands. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted on the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

The upper plate top decoration member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LEDs of the upper plate top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper plate top decoration member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating and decorating 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed and suppressed from deteriorating in interest. be able to.

The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 of the present embodiment is a storage plate, the plate unit 200 of the present embodiment is a bulge portion, and the touch unit 220B (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) of the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is The post-upper plate decorative substrate 235, the post-upper decorative member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the present embodiment correspond to luminous bodies as the effect presentation means.

In this way, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the touch unit 220B of the performance operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, the game. When displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the region 5a, the outside of the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game region 5a Since the band-shaped linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like are made to emit light along the peripheral edge, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a. However, the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like entering from the outside of the line of sight (visual field) can be noticed, and the line of sight (interest) of the player to the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can be attracted. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light when an effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, so that the player can use the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the presentation of the presentation noticeable, and it is possible to entertain the presentation by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image in accordance with the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is being used will indicate the arrival of a chance, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be cared for. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from moving to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image that suggests the arrival of a chance on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the player pay attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the opportunity to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may cause the player to be unable to concentrate on either side, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in accordance with the arrival, it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and entertain the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and it is possible to make the game clearer and less tiring.

Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 which bulges toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, which makes it difficult for the player to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind it. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unpleasant and deteriorating by being watched by another player, and at the same time, the upper plate liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when the effect is displayed by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a spot shape, and the player Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to make the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like notice easily, and entertaining the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like. It is possible to suppress the decrease. Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, a light emitting mode different from that of other light emitting decorations and the like can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light emission of the light emitting decoration and the like. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a rear position near the game area 5a on the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be easily made visible to the player, and the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, the plate operation unit 220 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is set within the game area 5a. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to check the amount of game balls to be inserted at a certain frequency, when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, it is possible to immediately shift the line of sight to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, which delights the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the production operation unit 220 is arranged below the game area 5a and the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is radiated to the player from below, when arranged above the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the eyes and to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible for the player to surely pay attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the effect by the operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, the effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246 can be performed, and the player can be entertained with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the effect and deteriorating the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (the linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B moves the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). Along with the guide passage portion 212a for sending, an upper dish ball removing button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guide passage portion 212a and the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B to produce an effect by the touch unit 220B (an effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper plate lower cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball are exposed by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows under the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and thus the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for light-emitting decoration of the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a pachislot machine are fused. , And in this case also, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

[3. Dispensing device]
Next, the payout device 830 arranged on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54. 47 is a perspective view (a) of the dispensing device viewed from the upper front side, and a perspective view (b) of the lower front side thereof. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the front side, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device as seen from the rear side, FIG. 50 is a right side view of the payout device, and FIG. 51 is a view of the payout device in which the prize ball table box is cut along the line XX of FIG. FIG. 52A is a perspective view when the non-ball-slot is seen from the front side, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view when the ball-slot is removed, and FIG. 52 is a payout device in which the prize ball back box is cut along the line YY of FIG. 50. (A) at the time of non-ball cutting seen from the back side of FIG. 53, and FIG. 53 is a perspective view at the time of ball cutting (b). FIG. 53 is a payout obtained by cutting the prize ball table box along the line XX in FIG. FIG. 54 is a front view (a) of the device during non-ball removal, and a rear view (b) of the dispensing device in which the prize ball back box is cut along the line YY in FIG. 50 during non-ball removal, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the maintenance of an apparatus. 51(a), (b), and FIG. 53(a), the prize ball intermediate gear, the detection disk, and the like are shown by imaginary lines for the sake of easy viewing of the drawings.

The payout device 830 is a box-shaped prize ball table box 831 having a curved passage 831b forming a ball passage with a pair of curved passage walls 831a, a prize ball passage 831c, and a rearward opening in which a ball removal passage 831d is formed, A box-like shape that covers the rear surface of the prize ball surface box 831 and that is open at the front where the bent passage 832b, the prize ball passage 832c, and the ball removal passage 832d that form a ball passage by the pair of bent passage walls 832a are formed. A prize ball back box 832, a game ball passing through a bend passage 831b formed in the prize ball back box 831 when the prize ball back box 831 is attached to the prize ball back box 831, and a bend passage formed in the prize ball back box 832. A prize ball partition plate 833 for preventing a game ball passing through 832b from entering each other, and a game ball passing through a curved passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 are formed in the prize ball table box 831. Award ball removal lever for discharging the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 to the ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832. 834 and a gear group that covers the front surface of the prize ball table box 831 and is provided in the surface area of the prize ball table box 831 (composed of a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842, which will be described later). And a box-shaped prize ball gear cover 835 having an opening at the rear. The bent passage 832b, the prize ball passage 832c, and the ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 correspond to the bend passage 831b, the prize ball passage 831c, and the ball removal passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831. It is provided at each position. Here, the configuration of the prize ball front box 831, the prize ball back box 832, the prize ball middle partition plate 833, the prize ball removing lever 834, and the prize ball gear cover 835 will be described, followed by the fixed position of the sprocket and the payout. The maintenance of the device will be described.

[3-1. Prize ball table box]
First, the structure of the award ball front box 831 will be described. The award ball front box 831 is formed in a rectangular box shape with an opening at the rear, and extends from the bottom surface of the award ball front box 831 toward the award ball back box 832. The curved passage 831b is formed by a pair of curved passage walls 831a that are protruded. Of the pair of bent passage walls 831a, one of the bent passage walls 831a is seen from the front of the prize ball table box 831, and from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball table box 831 to the downstream side from the middle to the left side. The curved path doubles as the left side wall of the prize ball table box 831 from the front side of the downstream end to the downstream end, while the other bent passage wall 831a is viewed from the front side of the prize ball table box 831. The right end of the prize ball table box 831 is formed by forming a notch 831e in a portion of the prize ball table box 831 that is bent from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball table box 831 to the downstream side to the right. Also serves as a side wall.

A support shaft 831f projects from the bottom surface of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 at the upper end of the notch 831e formed in the other bent passage wall 831a. A ball-removing piece 836 that can swing by being attached is attached. This ball-removing piece 836 is formed by curving the shaft portion 836a into which the support shaft 831f is inserted at one end and the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a so as to be flush with each other. The side wall portion 836b that can close the portion 831e is integrally formed, and is opposite to the rolling surface of the side wall portion 836b on which the game ball rolls on the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a. Reinforcing ribs 836c are formed on the side surface. A support shaft 832f protruding from a prize ball back box 832 described below is inserted into the other end of the ball punching piece 836, and a side wall portion 836b of the ball punching piece 836 projects into a prize ball back box 832. The upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 832a that is provided are curved and formed so as to be flush with each other.

Below the cutout portion 831e formed in the other bent passage wall 831a, a passage partition wall 831g is formed so as to form a pair of left and right bent passage walls 831a from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball table box 831. Has been formed. That is, two passages are formed by the bent passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831g that are bent in the left-right direction from the middle of the prize ball table box 831. One passage forms the bent passage 831b, and the other passage forms the hollow ball. It constitutes the passage 831d. The passage partition wall 831g is a recessed space forming a board mounting housing space 831h for housing and mounting a prize ball case substrate 847 on which a rotation angle switch 846 for detecting a rotation position of a sprocket 837, which will be described later, is mounted. Are formed by being formed rearward from the surface of the prize ball table box 831. The board mounting accommodation space 831h is a passage partition wall 831g that constitutes the bending passage 831b, and a sprocket 837 that receives a game ball passing through the bending passage 831b and sends it to the prize ball passage 831c is arranged on the downstream side of the bending passage 831b. It is formed so as to form a sphere delivery space 831k.

A passage partition wall 831i is formed so as to project from the bottom surface of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 from the lower part of the ball delivery space 831k to the downstream end of the prize ball front box 831. In other words, along the curved passage wall 831a on the downstream side that bends left from the middle of the prize ball table box 831, a passage for sending out the game balls received in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837, and the middle to left of the prize ball table box 831. The curved passage wall 831a on the downstream side which is bent to the side and the passage defined by the passage partition wall 831i are formed to communicate with each other, and this passage constitutes the prize ball passage 831c.

As described above, the sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space 831k. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a into which game balls fit are formed at equal intervals of 120 degrees. A ball delivery space 832k, which will be described later, is also formed in the prize ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. The sprocket 837 is also rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space 832k. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b into which game balls are fitted are formed equally every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 have the three ball recess spaces 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. Are arranged on the front side of the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837. Further, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three sprockets 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832. The recesses 837b and the recesses 837b are arranged so as to be offset from each other by 60 degrees.

On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 831c, there is a guide protrusion 831m for guiding the game ball sent by the sprocket 837 to a ball intake (not shown) provided in the upper tank ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. It is provided so as to project from the bottom surface of the box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832. Below the guide protrusion 831m, a counting switch 838 for detecting the game ball guided by the guide protrusion 831m is arranged. The counting switch 838 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a game sphere passes at the tip, and the lower side of the bent passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831i forming the sphere delivery space 831k. The counting switch 838 is sandwiched and supported by the sensor mounting portions 831n formed on the lower side and the sensor mounting portions 831n formed on the lower side. A wiring port 831o for passing electric wiring to the counting switch 838 is provided in the vicinity of the sensor mounting portion 831n formed below the passage partition wall 831i and below the prize ball table box 831. The wiring port 831o communicates with the above-mentioned board mounting housing space 831h.

Further, on the upper side of the prize ball table box 831, when the prize ball table box 831 is viewed from the front, the left bent passage wall 831a of the pair of bent passage walls 831a and the left wall of the prize ball table box 831 are provided. A motor housing space 831p for housing the payout motor 839 is formed between the spaces. The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 839 is housed in the motor housing space 831p. The payout motor 839 is fixed to the bottom surface side of the prize ball table box 831 by a screw (not shown) by a pair of mounting pieces 839b formed on the front surface thereof. The prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. A shaft insertion hole 831q having a shape larger than the outer shape of the prize ball motor gear 840 is formed in the bottom surface of the prize ball cover box 831 so as to be attached. A wire port 831o for passing an electric wire to the payout motor 839 is provided above the cylindrical main body of the payout motor 839 and above the prize ball table box 831.

Further, on the upper side of the prize ball table box 831, when viewing the prize ball table box 831 from the front side, the bent passage wall 831a on the right side of the pair of bent path walls 831a, and the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831, In between, the game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are discharged to the ball removal passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and formed in the prize ball back box 832. A mechanism for activating a ball removing piece 836 for discharging a game ball passing through the bending passage 832b to a ball removing passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 is formed. On the side of the bent passage wall 831a on the right side, a position defining wall extending from the bottom wall of the prize ball front box 831 to the prize ball back box 832 side from the upper wall of the prize ball front box 831 to the vicinity of the support shaft 831f described above. 831r is projected. On the side of the position defining wall 831r closer to the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831, there are a position where the prize ball removing lever 834 is maintained in a state where it is not operated and a state where the prize ball removing lever 834 is operated to remove the ball. Recesses 831s for defining the maintaining position and the maintaining position are formed separately in the vertical direction. A guide piece 831t for sliding the prize ball removing lever 834 in the vertical direction is provided near the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831 so as to project from the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832. Has been done. A cutout 831u is formed on the rear upper side of the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831 so that an operating portion 834aa of a prize ball removal lever 834, which will be described later, projects from the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831.

The gear group provided in the surface area of the prize ball table box 831 includes a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842. As described above, the tip of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 penetrates through the shaft insertion hole 831q formed in the bottom surface of the prize ball cover box 831 and projects to the surface of the prize ball cover box 831. The prize ball motor gear 840 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth Z1=12) is fixed. Below the prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth Z2=60) that meshes with the prize ball motor gear 840 is rotatably provided on the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843. Below the gear 841, a detection disk 842 having a prize ball sprocket gear 844 (in the present embodiment, the number of teeth Z3=54) that meshes with the prize ball intermediate gear 841 is attached to a prize ball sprocket shaft 845 that supports the sprocket 837. It is rotatably installed. One end of the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 is supported by a bearing cylinder 835a protruding from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 described later, and the other end thereof protrudes from the surface of the prize ball cover box 831. It is adapted to be supported by the cylinder 831v. One end of the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is supported by a bearing cylinder 835b protruding from the bottom surface of a prize ball gear cover 835 described later, and the other end is projected from the bottom surface of a prize ball back box 832 described below. Although supported by the bearing cylinder 832v, a shaft through hole 831w formed in the lower side of the gear region (to the left of the above-mentioned board mounting accommodation space 831h when the prize ball table box 831 is viewed from the front). Sprocket 837 is rotatably rotatably supported in the above-mentioned ball delivery space 831k, and the detection disk 842 is rotatably rotatably supported in a space formed by the prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball table box 831. There is.

An uneven joint portion 842a is formed on the center rear surface portion of the detection disk 842, and an uneven joint portion 837c is formed on the front end portion of the sprocket 837. The joint portion 842a and the sprocket 837 formed on the detection disk 842 are formed. The detection disk 842 and the sprocket 837 can rotate integrally with the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 as a center by engaging with the jointed portion 837c formed in. Therefore, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842 to rotate. Is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 through.

The outer circumference of the detection disk 842 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the prize ball sprocket gear 844, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the prize ball sprocket gear 844 is the same as the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837. The number of detection notches 842b (in this embodiment, three recesses 837a, three recesses 837b, six in total) are formed. The detection notch 842b is mounted on a prize ball case substrate 847 that is sandwiched and supported by the substrate mounting portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the substrate mounting housing space 831h described above. It is detected by the corner switch 846. The rotation angle switch 846 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 837 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 842b detected within a predetermined time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 846 (in many cases, the sprocket 837 is in a ball-damaged state), the sprocket 837 is normally and reversely rotated a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, a ball-gammed state). To do. The number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 838 described above. The other end side of the prize ball case inner substrate 847 is also sandwiched by a substrate mounting portion 835c formed on a prize ball gear cover 835 described later.

In the prize ball sprocket gear 844, insertion holes 844a are equally distributed in every 60 and are formed on the same circumference. An arcuate tool insertion slot 831zz is formed on the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 at a position corresponding to the same circumference where these insertion holes 844a are arranged. By rotating the prize ball sprocket gear 844, the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz can be used to confirm the rotation degree of a gear group including the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disk 842. In order to confirm the rotating condition of the sprocket 837, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is inserted into one insertion hole 844a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 through the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz. Is. Regarding the arc length of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz, at least one of the prize-ball sprocket gear 844 has one insertion hole 844a when the tool is rotated toward one end of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz with a tool. Another insertion hole 844a adjacent to the insertion hole 844a appears from the other end of the arcuate tool insertion slot 831zz on the side opposite to the rotation direction and can be visually recognized.

[3-2. Award ball back box]
Next, the structure of the award ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the award ball front box 831 will be described. The award ball back box 832 is formed in a rectangular box shape with the front opening. A curved passage 832b is formed by a pair of curved passage walls 832a protruding from the bottom surface toward the prize ball cover box 831. Of the pair of curved passage walls 832a, one of the curved passage walls 832a is seen from the front of the prize ball back box 832, and from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball back box 832 to the left side from substantially the middle to the downstream side. The curved path doubles as the left side wall of the prize ball back box 832 from the front side of the downstream end to the downstream end, while the other bent passage wall 832a is viewed from the front side of the prize ball back box 832. The right end of the prize ball back box 832 is formed by forming a notch 832e in a portion that bends from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball back box 832 to the downstream side substantially from the middle to the downstream side. Also serves as a side wall.

A support shaft 832f projects from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 at the upper end of the cutout portion 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a. A ball-removing piece 836 that can swing by being attached is attached. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 836a of the ball punching piece 836 is inserted with the support shaft 831f protruding from the prize ball table box 831, and the other end of the shaft portion 836a of the ball punching piece 836 is By inserting a support shaft 832f projecting from the ball back box 832, the support shaft 831f and 832f can swing. Further, as described above, the side wall portion 836b of the ball removing piece 836 is curved so that the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other curved passage wall 831a protruding from the prize ball table box 831 are flush with each other. Can be formed to close the notch 831e, and is curved so that the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 832a protruding from the prize ball back box 832 are flush with each other. The notch 832e is formed so that the notch 832e can be closed and is formed as one smooth surface.

Below the cutout portion 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a, the prized ball back box 832 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 832a that are divided into left and right from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. A passage partition wall 832g is formed from the bottom surface of the box toward the prize ball cover box 831 side. That is, two passages are formed by the bent passage wall 832a and the passage partition wall 832g that bend in the left-right direction from the middle of the prize ball back box 832. It constitutes the passage 832d. The downstream side of the bending passage 832b is formed so as to form a ball delivery space 832k for arranging a sprocket 837 that receives a game ball passing through the bending passage 832b and sends it to the prize ball passage 832c.

A passage partition wall 832i is formed so as to project from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 from the lower part of the ball delivery space 832k to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. That is, a passage for sending out the game balls received in the recessed portion 837b of the sprocket 837 along the curved passage wall 832a on the downstream side, which is bent leftward from the middle of the prize ball back box 832, and the middle to left of the prize ball back box 832. A curved passage wall 832a on the downstream side that is bent inward and a passage formed by the passage partition wall 832i are formed in communication with each other, and this passage constitutes a prize ball passage 832c.

A sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space 832k. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b into which game balls are fitted are formed equally every 120 degrees. As described above, the sprocket 837 is also rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 arranged in front of the prize ball back box 832. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a into which game balls fit are formed at equal intervals of 120 degrees. In other words, the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 have the three ball recesses 837b formed in the prize ball front box 831 arranged in front of the prize ball back box 832. The sprocket 837 arranged in the space 831k is arranged rearward of the three recesses 837a. Further, as described above, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are disposed. The three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 and the three recesses 837b are arranged so as to be offset by 60 degrees from each other.

On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 832c, there is a guide projection 832m for guiding the game ball sent by the sprocket 837 to a ball intake (not shown) provided in the upper tank ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. It is provided so as to project from the bottom surface of the box 832 toward the prize ball back box 832. Below the guide protrusion 832m, a counting switch 838 for detecting the game ball guided by the guide protrusion 832m is arranged. As described above, the counting switch 838 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which the game ball passes, and one end of the counting switch 838 forms a ball delivery space 831k. A bent passage wall 832a that is sandwiched and supported by sensor mounting portions 831n formed on the lower side of the passage wall 831a and the lower side of the passage partition wall 831i, and the other end of the counting switch 838 forms a sphere delivery space 832k. It is sandwiched and supported by sensor mounting portions 832n formed on the lower side and the lower side of the passage partition wall 832i.

The other end of the award ball sprocket shaft 845 described above is inserted into the bottom surface of the award ball sprocket shaft 845 to support the bearing ball sprocket shaft 845. It is projected toward 831.

Further, on the upper side of the prize ball back box 832, when viewing the prize ball back box 832 from the front, the left bent passage wall 832a of the pair of bent passage walls 832a and the left side wall of the prize ball back box 832 are provided. A motor housing space 832p for housing the payout motor 839 is formed between the spaces. The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 839 is housed inside the motor housing space 832p. On the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 facing the back surface of the payout motor 839 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the output shaft 839a is provided), a heat dissipation port 832r for releasing heat generated from the payout motor 839 to the outside. Are drilled.

Further, on the upper side of the prize ball back box 832, when the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front side, the bent passage wall 832a on the right side of the pair of bent passage walls 832a and the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, In between, the game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are discharged to the ball removal passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and formed in the prize ball back box 832. A mechanism for operating a ball removing piece 836 for discharging the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b to the ball removing passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 is formed. On the side of the bent passage wall 832a on the right side, a position defining wall extending from the bottom wall of the prize ball back box 832 to the vicinity of the support shaft 832f from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831. 832s is projected. On the side of the position defining wall 832s closer to the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, there are a position where the prize ball removing lever 834 is maintained in a state where it is not operated and a state where the prize ball removing lever 834 is operated to remove the ball. Recesses 832t for defining the maintaining position and the maintaining position are formed separately in the vertical direction. A guide piece 832u for sliding the prize ball removing lever 834 in the vertical direction is provided near the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 so as to project from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831. Has been done. A cutout portion 832x is formed on the upper rear side of the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 for allowing an operation portion 834aa of a prize ball removal lever 834 described later to project from the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832.

Further, on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832, a pair of insertion pieces 832y is moved upward at a position corresponding to a pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. It is projected toward.

Further, a cutout portion 832z for inserting a lock projection portion (not shown) formed in the main body frame base 600 shown in FIG. 4 is formed from the center of the lower wall of the prize ball back box 832.

Further, on the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832, a tool insertion slot 832zz for inserting a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is provided on the side wall of the ball removal piece 836 in order to confirm the swinging condition of the ball removal piece 836. The hole is formed by bending along the shape of the portion 836b.

[3-3. Dividers in prize balls]
Next, when attaching the prize ball back box 832 to the prize ball front box 831, a game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and a game passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. The structure of the award ball partition plate 833 for preventing the balls from entering each other will be described. The award ball partition plate 833 has a shape of a bent passage 831b formed in the award ball table box 831 and a prize. It is formed in a plate shape bent along the shape of the bent passage 832b formed in the ball back box 832.

The upper surface of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 is flush with the upper surface of the prize ball front box 831 and the upper surface of the prize ball back box 832 when sandwiched between the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box 832. Become. The game balls passing through the front guide passage and the rear guide passage of the ball guide unit 920 can smoothly flow into the upper end of the front surface and the upper end of the rear surface of the prize ball partition plate 833 (inflow). In order to make it easier), the inclined portions 833a are formed so that the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction of the award ball partition plate 833 gradually increases within a predetermined distance from the upper end of the award ball partition plate 833. Has been formed.

The lower surface of the prize ball partition plate 833 has a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball cover box 831 in a state where the prize ball partition plate 833 is sandwiched between the prize ball cover box 831 and the prize ball cover box 832. Between the three concave portions 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 and the three concave portions 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, and slightly above the main body of the sprocket 837. Has been reached. Then, at the lower end of the front surface and the lower end of the rear surface of the award ball partition plate 833, a game ball passing through a bent passage 831b formed in the award ball table box 831 is formed in the award ball table box 831. In order to smoothly flow into the three recesses 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 (for easy inflow), and the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is a prize ball back. In order to allow smooth inflow into the three recesses 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the box 832 (to facilitate inflow), the upper part from the lower end of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 is moved upward. The inclined portions 833b are formed so that the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction of the prize ball partition plate 833 is gradually increased within a predetermined distance dimension (that is, to the lower end portion of the prize ball partition plate 833). The inclined portions 833b are formed so that the cross-sectional area of the award ball partition plate 833 in the front-rear direction gradually decreases).

[3-4. Award ball ball removal lever]
Next, the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is discharged to the ball removal passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. The structure of the prize ball removing lever 834 for discharging the game ball passing through to the ball removing passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 will be described. The prize ball removing lever 834 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction. Lever body 834a, and an elongated plate-shaped elastic piece 834b is projected upward on the upper surface of the lever body 834a, and a convex portion 834ba is projected leftward on the upper end of the elastic piece 834b. Has been done. An operating portion 834aa is provided on the upper right side of the lever body 834a so as to protrude rightward. A convex portion 834ab (see FIGS. 53A and 53B) that can come into contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removing lever 834 is directed to the left below the left surface of the lever body 834a. Is projected. Slide guide grooves 834ac and 834ad are formed on the front surface side and the rear surface side of the lever body 834a, respectively.

When the prize ball removing lever 834 is sandwiched between the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box 832, the slide guide groove 834ac formed on the front surface side of the lever body 834a protrudes into the prize ball cover box 831. The slide guide groove 834ad formed on the rear surface of the lever body 834a is inserted into the guide piece 831t provided, and is inserted into the guide piece 832u protruding from the prize ball back box 832. The extracting lever 834 can slide vertically along the guide pieces 831t and 832u. When the operation portion 834aa of the prize ball removing lever 834 is slid vertically, a protrusion 834ba protruding from the elastic piece 834b is formed on the position defining wall 831r protruding from the prize ball cover box 831. The lower recess 831s and the lower recess 832t formed on the position defining wall 832s projecting from the prize ball back box 832 are engaged with the lower recess 832s. By maintaining the state in which the convex portion 834ab provided is in contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removing lever 834, the side wall portion 836b of the ball removing piece 836 protrudes from the prize ball cover box 831. The notch 831e formed in the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a that is formed and the notch 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a that projects from the prize ball back box 832 can be closed. The state is maintained, and the state of being in contact with the right side surface of the award ball partition plate 833 is maintained. In such a state, the ball removing piece 836 is formed by the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and/or the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. Since the support shaft 831f protruding from the prize ball front box 831 and the support shaft 832f protruding from the prize ball back box 832 cannot be swung, the ball removing piece 836 is operated to remove the ball. It becomes impossible to discharge the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 to the ball removal passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box. The game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in 832 cannot be discharged into the ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832.

On the other hand, when the operation portion 834aa of the prize ball removing lever 834 is slid in the vertical direction, the projection 834ba protruding from the elastic piece 834b is protruded from the prize ball cover box 831. In the state of engaging with the upper recess 831s formed in 831r and the upper recess 832t formed in the position defining wall 832s protruding from the prize ball back box 832, the lower left side of the lever body 834a is engaged. By releasing the state in which the convex portion 834ab protruding from the ball abuts on the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removing lever 834, the side wall portion 836b of the ball removing piece 836 is attached to the prize ball front box 831. Closing the notch 831e formed on the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a protruding and the notch 832e formed on the other bent passage wall 832a protruding on the prize ball back box 832. The state of being able to move is released, and the state of being in contact with the right side surface of the award ball partition plate 833 is released. In such a state, the ball removing piece 836 is formed by the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and/or the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. Since it can be swung with respect to the support shaft 831f and the support shaft 832f protruding from the prize ball back box 832, the ball removing piece 836 can be operated to remove the ball, and the prize ball front box 831 can be provided. The game ball passing through the formed bent passage 831b can be discharged to the ball removing passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the game passes through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. The ball is ready to be discharged into the ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832. The game balls discharged from the ball removal passages 831d and 832d go to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a ball discharge passage 865 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 included in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is discharged and supplied to a ball lifting device installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown).

[3-5. Prize ball gear cover]
Next, a gear group that covers the front surface of the prize ball cover box 831 and is provided in the surface area of the prize ball cover box 831 (comprised of a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842). The structure of the prize ball gear cover 835 covering the prize ball gear cover 835 is described below. The prize ball gear cover 835 is formed in a rectangular box shape with an opening at the rear and is arranged in front of the prize ball cover box 831. It is composed of a ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842.) The gear partition wall 835d faces from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the prize ball cover box 831 so that the electric wiring is not caught. As a result, the gear protection space 835e is formed, and a space other than the gear protection space 835e is formed as a wiring space 835f for routing the electric wiring.

One end of the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 described above is inserted into the gear protection space 835e to support a bearing cylinder 835a supporting the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the front surface of the prize ball gear cover 835. A bearing cylinder 835b, which is projected and has one end of the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 described above inserted below the bearing cylinder 835a and supporting the prize ball sprocket shaft 845, extends from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the prize ball gear cover. It protrudes toward the front surface of 835. Further, in the gear protection space 835e, the prize ball case in-board 847 is sandwiched and supported by the board mounting portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the board mounting accommodation space 831h of the prize ball front box 831 described above. A board mounting portion 835c for sandwiching and supporting the other end side of the ball is provided so as to project from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 toward the prize ball cover box 831.

In the wiring space 835f, the prize ball table box 831 is provided on the upper side and the right side of the bottom surface of the gear protection space 835e through the wiring port 831o of the prize ball table box 831 provided near the upper portion of the cylindrical body of the payout motor 839. A wiring processing piece 835g, which hangs and collects electric wiring to the payout motor 839 which is screwed and fixed to the bottom surface side of the ball, protrudes from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 toward the prize ball table box 831. Has been done.

In addition to the electrical wiring to the payout motor 839 that is collected by the wiring processing piece 835g, the electrical wiring to the counting switch attached to the back surface side of the prize ball table box 831 (the electrical wiring to the counting switch 838 is near the counting switch 838). Can be passed through the wiring hole 831o of the prize ball table box 831 which is opened at the board mounting housing space 831h of the prize ball table box 831) and the board mounting housing of the prize ball table box 831. Electrical wiring to the prize ball case substrate 847 housed in the space 831h is passed from the wiring space 835f to the outside of the gear protection space 835e (that is, the payout control of the payout device 830 is performed, and the payout control illustrated in FIG. 4 is performed. A wiring cutout 835h for passing an electrical wiring that electrically connects the payout control board 4110 housed in the board box 950 and the payout device 830 is formed on the lower side of the right side wall of the gear protection space 835e.

It should be noted that through holes 831y are formed in the prize ball front box 831 at positions corresponding to the tips of the mounting bosses 832w projecting from the prize ball back box 832, and at the positions corresponding to the through holes 831y. 835i is formed in the prize ball gear cover 835. By fitting the mounting hole 835i, the through hole 831y, and the mounting boss 832w with each other, by screwing with a screw (not shown) from the front surface of the prize ball gear cover 835, the prize ball table box 831 and the prize ball middle partition plate 833 are attached. The prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball back box 832 are integrally fixed in a sandwiched state.

In addition, the prize ball gear cover 835 is detachably attached to the rear surface side of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided with the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. A plurality of hook-shaped engaging portions 835k for attachment are provided in a protruding manner, and when the payout device 830 is pressed against the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and slid upward, along the vertical direction on the rear surface of the payout unit base 801. A guide protrusion 835m to be inserted into a guide groove (not shown) is formed so as to project. These hook-shaped engaging portions 835k are respectively engaged with engaging protrusions (not shown) formed on the main body frame base 600, and push the dispensing device 830 against the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801, and move upward. By sliding and pushing it up, the hook-shaped engaging portion 835k and the engaging protrusion (not shown) engage with each other. Then, the pair of insertion pieces 832y formed on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832 are inserted into the pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. The upper end surface of 830 and the lower end surface of the ball guiding unit 920 come into contact with each other, and at this time, the lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 included in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 4 is pushed upward. Thus, the lock protrusion (not shown) formed on the lock member 870 is inserted into the cutout portion 832z formed on the lower wall of the prize ball back box 832 so that the lock protrusion (not shown) and the cutout portion 832z are engaged with each other. To do. Thereby, the payout device 830 can be fixed to the rear surface side of the payout unit base 801.

[3-6. Fixed position of sprocket]
Next, the fixed position of the sprocket 837 will be described. The rotation angle of the sprocket 837 is configured so that the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 can be detected by the rotation angle switch 846 as described above. Has been done. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 housed in the payout control board box 950 shown in FIG. 4, which drives and controls the payout motor 839, and the payout control board 4110 detects the rotation angle switch 846. The rotation position of the sprocket 837 can be grasped based on the signal. When the payout control board 4110 stops the rotational position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position, when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is predetermined. After being rotated by the specified rotation angle, the sprocket 837 is maintained in the standby state by maintaining the drive stopped state.

As described above, on the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, three recesses 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally formed every 120 degrees. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, three recesses 837b into which game balls are fitted are formed equally every 120 degrees, and a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831. The three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the space and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged 60 degrees apart from each other. There is. Each time the sprocket 837 makes one revolution, the game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b can be sent out to the downstream side of a maximum of 6 game balls.

When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates, as described above, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disk 842 to rotate. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the gear 844. The payout motor 839 is a small stepping motor, and when the output shaft 839a is rotated by 15 steps, the sprocket 837 is rotated by 60 degrees, so that the game ball received in any one of the above-described recesses 837a and 837b. It is possible to send one ball to the downstream side, and when the output shaft 839a is rotated 90 steps, the sprocket 837 makes 360 degrees, that is, one rotation, so that all the game balls received by the above-mentioned recesses 837a, 837b are made downstream. Can be sent to the side.

When the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, as shown in FIG. 53(a), at the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 on a certain ridge line is received and the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 is shown. Is controlled by the payout control board 4110 so as to be in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. There is.

In the present embodiment, as the payout motor 839, the same one as a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. This small stepping motor is an extremely small stepping motor having an outer diameter of a cylindrical body of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839 which is such a small stepping motor, the static torque is extremely small, so that the game ball received in the concave portion 837a of the sprocket 837 passes through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 and the subsequent passage. The sprocket exceeds the stationary torque of the payout motor 839 due to the weight of the game ball and the weight of the subsequent game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 with respect to the game ball received in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837. The state in which the rotation of 837 is stopped cannot be maintained, and the sprocket 837 may be rotated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the fixed position of the sprocket 837, as described above, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket 837 shown in FIG. 53 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 while the game ball passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received on the ridge line which is the boundary with the 837a. As shown in (b), the sprocket 837 is set in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. In the state where is maintained at a fixed position, the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is sprocket with respect to the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recessed portion 837a. When the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side, the load can be applied in the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 53A), whereas the prize ball The own weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the box 832 is opposite to the sprocket 837 with respect to the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recessed portion 837b, and the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side. The load can be applied in the clockwise direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 53B). The load due to the weight of the game ball is well balanced on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a and on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. It can be given and balanced.

Accordingly, the sprocket 837 is set at a fixed position, and the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied in a well-balanced state to balance the load, so that the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor with extremely small static torque, is adopted. , It is possible to keep the sprocket 837 stopped at a fixed position. Further, in the state where the sprocket 837 is stopped at the fixed position, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied in a well-balanced state and is in a balanced state. Therefore, when the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, is driven. It is possible to prevent the load on the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 from significantly increasing, prevent step-out, and rotate the sprocket 837 smoothly.

Further, as described above, the load due to the weight of the game ball is placed on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a and on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. Since they can be given in a well-balanced state and balanced, even if an earthquake occurs after shutting off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the game hall is closed, the sprocket The probability that the rotational position deviates from the fixed position can be suppressed to a small level.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 839 is the same as a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. Accordingly, by reducing the distance dimension in the depth direction of the payout device 830, it is possible to secure a large distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the payout device 830, which corresponds to the payout device 830. A large space in the depth direction on the rear surface of the game board 5 at the position can be secured, and a large movable body device having a plurality of electric drive sources can be arranged.

In addition, for example, in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837, while the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received and stopped, the recess 837b of the sprocket 837 is formed in the prize ball back box 832. In the case of not accepting the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b to be received by the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is received in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837. If it is received by the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 without it, the weight of the succeeding game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is in the axial direction of the sprocket 837, that is, the prize ball sprocket shaft that supports the sprocket 837. While being given as a load in the axial direction of the 845, the game ball received in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837 is a load for rotating the sprocket 837, which passes through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831. Since the own weight of the game ball is given, on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recessed portion 837a, and on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recessed portion 837b, In addition, there is a drawback that the load due to the own weight of the game ball is applied in a well-balanced state and the balanced state is destroyed, which is not preferable as the fixed position of the sprocket 837.

[3-7. Maintenance of payout device]
Next, the maintenance of the payout device 830 will be described. The rotation degree of the gear group including the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disk 842 is confirmed, and the rotation degree of the sprocket 837 is confirmed. 54A, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is punched from the front side of the dispensing device 830 (the front side of the prize ball table box 831) to the prize ball table box 831. It can be performed by inserting it into one insertion hole 844a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 through the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz and rotating it along the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz. Thereby, it is possible to confirm that the tooth is broken and the rotation is not transmitted to any of the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the prize ball sprocket gear 844, and the bending passage 831b, If the game ball is not sent out from the prize ball passages 831c and 832c even though the game ball is put in the 832b and the detection disk 842 having the prize ball sprocket gear 844 is rotating, it is formed on the detection disk 842. It is also possible to confirm that there is a problem in the engagement state between the joint portion 842a and the jointed portion 837c formed on the sprocket 837.

Further, when confirming the swinging condition of the ball removing piece 836, as shown in FIG. 54B, the operating portion 834aa of the prize ball removing lever 834 is slid upward to move the ball removing piece 836. After making it possible to swing, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is punched from the back side of the dispensing device 830 (the back side of the prize ball back box 832) to the prize ball back box 832. By swinging the ball-removing piece 836 by touching the side wall portion 836b of the ball-removing piece 836 and the reinforcing rib 836c of the ball-removing piece 836 through the tool-inserting long hole 832zz and moving along the curved tool-insertion long-hole 832zz. Can be made This makes it possible to confirm that the ball-removing piece 836 cannot be swung or cannot be swung smoothly due to, for example, a cigarette tar or dust, and the piano wire or wire is repeatedly used. Such a state can be eliminated by moving the tool such as the tool along the curved tool insertion slot 832zz.

[4. Detailed composition of game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 5 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. 55 is a front view showing a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 2 described above, and FIG. 56 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 55.

The game board 5 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112. Further, the game board 5 includes a frame-shaped front component member 1110A and a plate-shaped game panel 1200. The front component member 1110A defines an inner circumference of a game area 1100 in which a game ball (also simply referred to as “ball”) as a game medium is launched by a player operating the handle device 500. On the other hand, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A to be arranged as the rear end of the game area 1100 to form the game area 1100.

The game panel 1200 includes a transparent panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown). The panel plate has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A, and has an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. On the other hand, the panel holder holds the panel plate detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A.

The table unit in the game board 5 is provided along the inner periphery of the lower left area of the game area 1100, and the attacker unit 2100 which is arranged at the lowermost part in the game area 1100 so as to extend from the position directly above the outlet to the right in front view. A front side unit, a gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly higher than the center in the up-down direction near the left end in front view in the game area 1100, and a frame shape arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100. Center accessory 2500, a movable decorative body 3250 provided inside the center accessory 2500, and various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals input from various decorative boards of the game board 5 described later. Based on the so-called 7-segment display, a 7-segment display device 1800 that displays a decorative stop symbol that decoratively imitates a stop symbol of a special symbol to be described later, and a lighting input from various decorative boards of the game board 5 described later. Signals, variable display lamps 1701, 1702, 1703 that repeat lighting and blinking while the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on various signals such as a flashing signal and a gradation lighting signal are provided.

Further, on the rear side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 5, a peripheral control board box for accommodating a peripheral control board to be described later is provided, which will be described in detail later.

Further, in the game board 5, the game area 1100 is roughly divided into left and right by the center role object 2500 attached to the game panel 1200, and the outer periphery on the right side of the center role object 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (inside the front component member 1110A). Between the outer circumference of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A). Between them is a large area where game balls can be distributed sufficiently. In the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board.

When the game ball is launched to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game board 5 distributes the game ball from the upstream side of the stop portion of the front component member 1110A by the distribution entry passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500. It is sent to the 2530 side. Further, this game ball is discharged to the left or right in the distribution space 2530 by the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550, and then discharged from the discharge port. After that, this game ball is guided by the guide passage 2540 and is discharged into the game area 1100 from a discharge opening that is opened on the upstream side of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. In this way, the game ball can be accepted through the distribution space 2530 to the open special winning opening 2103 with a high probability.

In this game board 5, when a game ball is shot to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game balls are guided toward the gate unit 2300 and the front side unit by a plurality of implanted nails, or on the way. When it enters the warp entrance 2504, it is released right above the first starting opening 2101 through the stage 2510 and wins the gate 2301, the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the starting openings 2101 and 2102, and the big winning opening 2103. It is possible to make it possible to enjoy the original game by the movement of the game ball.

In other words, in the route on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the player can entertain the movement of the game ball by bouncing the game ball with an obstacle nail, while on the route on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is It is possible to reduce the chances of contact as much as possible and distribute the game balls in the distribution space 2530, or to easily accept the game balls into the special winning opening 2103.

The function display unit 1180 includes a display unit 1181 described later, and is provided at a position where the game board 5 can be viewed from the player side with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, for example, below the front component member 1110. There is. Function display unit 1180, game state display 1183, first special symbol memory display 1184, first special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol memory display The device 1188, the normal symbol display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are respectively attached to the front surface of a function display board described later. The function display unit 1180 is provided with connection terminals for connecting the function display board and the main control board 4100.

The above-mentioned display unit 1181 is accompanied by a game state display device 1183 (game state display means) including one LED for displaying the current game state, and the fact that the game ball has been received by the first starting opening 2101. First special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings, and the first special lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 including one 7-segment LED for displaying as a symbol, and the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery by receiving the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 (second special lottery result) ) A second special symbol display 1186 including one 7-segment LED for displaying as a second special symbol, and a second special symbol for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. And a memory display unit 1187. Note that the lottery executed when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is a precondition for executing the jackpot game, unlike a general jackpot drawing. This is a lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the condition device and an expected value of the prize ball amount. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if such a lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and this does not mean that the jackpot game mode is immediately started.

Further, the display unit 1181 is a normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of holdings associated with the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301, and the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. Ordinary symbol display device 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery that has been drawn as a normal symbol, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (the condition device operates)" , A round indicator 1190 including two LEDs for displaying the number of times (round number) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated.

The above-mentioned gaming state indicator 1183 is provided with a color LED whose emission color can be changed, for example, red, green and orange, and various gaming states can be obtained depending on the combination of the emitted light color and lighting or blinking. (For example, probability variation state, time saving state, probability variation and time saving state (probability variation state and time saving state), jackpot gaming state, etc.) are displayed.

The first special symbol storage display 1184, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is received in the first starting port 2101, the start of variable display Is to display the number of reservations (memory) of the first special symbol that has been reserved (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b.・Displays the number of holds by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Are lit together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball was received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the second special symbol that has been held (stored). This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. , Displays the number of holdings by flashing pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b light up, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that have been drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The 7-segment LED is stopped for a predetermined time according to the result of the special lottery, and then stopped, and the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes the first special lottery result and the second special lottery. Let the player recognize the lottery result.

Ordinary symbol display device 1189 is provided with red, green, and orange, and a color LED whose emission color can be changed, and the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2301 by a combination of the emission color to be emitted and lighting or blinking. The result of the ordinary lottery executed as the game passes is displayed. In addition, the normal symbol display device 1189 displays the normal symbol stop symbol in a mode corresponding to the result of the ordinary lottery after the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time like the special symbol.

Normal symbol storage display 1188, when the normal symbol can not be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the start of variable display is held (stored) normal symbol Displays the number of reservations (memory number). This normal symbol storage display 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d having LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary symbols held by sequentially lighting the normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d according to the number of holdings. To do. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbols is held (stored) up to four.

The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round display lamp, a six-round display lamp (not shown), a twelve-round display lamp (not shown), and a sixteen-round display lamp, and a jackpot game depending on the lighting mode of the lamp. Show the number of rounds in.

[5. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 62. 57 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, and FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between the payout control board forming the main board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board, FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 57, a board connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and the like. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing an example of the peripheral configuration of the VDP with a sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control section.

As shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling the game operation and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data. Main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board and the like, and various solenoids for driving. A main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a power failure of a predetermined voltage or a momentary power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”) are mainly provided. The above-mentioned main control program is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, and controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on.

In the main control MPU 4100a, in addition to its built-in RAM (corresponding to the "main control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), its main It also has a built-in watchdog timer to monitor operations (system) and functions to prevent fraud. The main control built-in RAM described above, as a part of its storage area, a big hit determination random number storage area, a special symbol random number storage area, a reach determination random number for each start storage information stored in a start storage information storage area described later. It has a storage area, random number 1 and 2 storage areas for variation patterns, random number storage area for variation types, and a starting storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area, which will be described later. Of these, the starting memory information storage area includes a first starting memory information storage area for the first special symbol and a second starting memory information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a big hit flag area in which a value of a big hit flag described later can be stored. As will be described later, the big hit flag indicates not only a loss (00H) or a big hit (01H) but also a small hit (02H). Therefore, if the main control MPU 4100a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area in which the value of the small hit flag can be stored, it is only a big hit or a loss. Instead, it is possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Since the ID code once added is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset terminal provided with the reset function It consists of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by the main control system reset which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A first starting opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting opening 2101, a second starting opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting opening 2102, and a general winning opening 2104 The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Also, the distribution detection sensor 2580, a gate switch 2301 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and a game ball for the large winning opening 2103. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 which outputs a detection signal when it is detected that it has been accepted, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 which detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are the panel relay terminal board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port thereof to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 starts port solenoid 2105, attacker solenoid 2108A, attacker solenoid 2108B, and distribution drive motor 2558 (Fig. (Not shown), or by outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the panel relay terminal Board 4161, and the first special symbol display device 1185, the second special symbol display device 1186, the first special symbol memory display device 1184, the second special symbol memory display device 1187, the normal symbol display device 1189 through the function display substrate 1191. , Ordinary symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190 to output a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2301, and the count switch 2110. As the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and passes through the gate portion 2350 frequently, so the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, and The detection of the game ball by the gate switch 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches are used.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, whereby the payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 4110. When the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game production and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Thereby, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM described above, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, and the like. The circuits are connected via the bus 4100ah (see FIG. 60). The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. 60). The main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It has a BC0. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 4100a stores various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear) from the operation switch 952 when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Signal) is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. It is supposed to be erased (cleared).

[6. Discharge control board]
Next, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 64. FIG. 58 is a block diagram of the payout control board, and FIG. 64 is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor of the payout device.

In addition to the operation switch 952 that also has various functions shown in FIG. 4 and the error LED indicator 953 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls regarding Here, the payout control unit 4110, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 4110, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, the excitation method of the payout motor 839, the switching circuit of the drive voltage to the payout motor 839, the power-on and power-off times. The drive voltage to the payout motor 839 and the switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 839 in and will be described.

[6-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 58, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payouts is a payout control MPU 4110a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. 48, a payout control input circuit 4110b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 4110c for outputting various signals to an external board, and the payout device 830 shown in FIG. A CR for exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 4110d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 and a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility in the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a unit input/output circuit 4110e. The payout control MPU 4110a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

The payout control input circuit 4110b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4110b is a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset IC (hereinafter referred to as “payout control system reset IC”), which is a dedicated IC that outputs a reset signal (not shown), is not input. Is configured as. That is, in the payout control input circuit 4110b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset IC, and thus various signals based on the information are output to the various outputs. It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

The payout control output circuit 4110c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are inputted to its various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function having a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 4110cb without a reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset described later, so that the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function is based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board or the like, not being reset by the payout control system reset IC. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball break switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit 920 shown in FIG. 4, and a prize for the payout device 830 shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b). The detection signal from the counting switch 838 that detects the game ball flowing down in the ball passages 831c and 832c is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 for detecting the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. , And is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch (not shown) that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, and a detection signal from a body frame opening switch (not shown) that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

In addition, is the inside of the full tank guide path formed in the lower full tank ball path unit 860 shown in FIG. 4 guiding to the full tank receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 16 full of game balls? A detection signal from a full tank switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

The payout control MPU 4110a issues various commands related to payout from a main control board (hereinafter, referred to as "main control board") (not shown) that controls the progress of the game accommodated in the main control board box provided in the game board 5. The payout control input circuit 4110b is used to receive at the input terminal of the serial input port. When the payout control MPU 4110a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board as serial data, the payout control output circuit with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to 4110ca, the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board.

Further, the payout control MPU 4110a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 4110cb, thereby issuing the payout without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4110cb to the main control board. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control board outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

Further, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function to perform payout with a reset function. The control signal output from the control output circuit 4110ca to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 839, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on the error LED display 953 to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function to the error LED display 953. ..

The error LED indicator 953 is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 953 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board and the payout). That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that "ball is out" (specifically, ball out switch). Based on the detection signal from 821, there is no game ball in the two ball guiding passages formed in the ball guiding unit 920), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball gaze" is displayed. There is a certain effect (specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, the bending passages 831b and 832b of the dispensing device 830 and the ball delivery spaces 831k and 832k shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b) communicate with each other. At the entrance, the sprocket 837 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance and the sprocket 837 is difficult to rotate. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838, the fact that the counting switch 838 is defective is informed, and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that "retry error" (specifically Indicates that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, not shown). The fact that the inside of the full tank guide path formed in the lower full tank ball path unit 860 that guides to the full tank ball receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 based on the detection signal from the tank switch is full of game balls) However, when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (from the payout control board 4110 to a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility in the gaming hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. "Electrical connection has been cut off at any of the points", and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically, a ball of a game ball that has not yet been paid out) That the number has reached a predetermined number of balls).

Further, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board (not shown) electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board to an external terminal board (not shown) electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown). is doing. This external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC are built-in), and is installed in the game hall via these plurality of photo couplers. The information such as the number of game balls and various information (game information) is transmitted to the respective hall computers. The external terminal board and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. Does not malfunction or break down, and the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout and the main control board that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is abnormal. A voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 331 of the ball lending operation unit 330 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 333 shown in FIG. 12 are adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are in the game hall. Input is made to a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility. The CR unit sends a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and this signal is given by the payout control MPU 4110a via the CR unit input/output circuit 4110e. It is designed to be input to the input terminal of the input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming ball, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334 of the ball rental operation unit 330. However, this signal is input to the display unit 334. A CR unit lamp (not shown) arranged near the display unit 334 emits light when the supply voltage from the CR unit is supplied.

The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board is shown as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Not equipped with each capacitor. With the capacitor for the payout control board 4110, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Further, the microprocessor (hereinafter, referred to as "main control MPU") mounted on the main control board by the capacitor for the main control board incorporates various information into the main control MPU in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”). As for various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b. The payout control MPU 4110a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function to the main control board. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, when this operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control board 4110, the main control is performed. The MPU judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM with built-in main control, and with this as a trigger, it is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM with built-in main control. Is becoming

[6-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 4110 will be described. The grounds (GND) of various boards and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

As shown in FIG. 64, the power supply board 931 is configured to include a synchronous rectification circuit 931a, a power factor correction circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power supply generation circuit 931d. 24 VAC supplied from the Pachinko Island facility is supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 931a. The synchronous rectifying circuit 931a rectifies 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified circuit to the power factor correction circuit 931b. The power factor correction circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to generate direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931c. The smoothing circuit 931c removes the supplied +37V ripple to smooth +37V and supplies the smoothed +37V to the power supply generation circuit 931d.

The power supply generation circuit 931d is DC+5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as “+5V”), DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) and DC from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is created.

The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 931d of the power source board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 4110. Of these three types of voltages, the two types of voltages of +12V and +24V are , Is supplied to the main control board provided in the game board 5 through the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 are peripheral control boards provided in the game board 5 (the peripheral control board is based on a command from the main control board, It controls the progress of various effects.), and is supplied to various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side.

The +5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit 951a to remove noise. The noise-removed +5V is supplied to a capacitor for a payout control board 4110 (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided for the payout control board 4110, and also a payout control MPU 4110a and a payout motor drive circuit. It is also supplied to 4110d and the like. +12V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is supplied not only to the payout control input circuit 4110b but also to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d and the like, and is provided on the game board 5 via the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the control board. The main control board provided in the game board 5 is provided with a +5V creation circuit (not shown). In this +5V creation circuit, a +12V to +5V power source supplied through the payout control board 4110 is created to create a main control filter (not shown). Supply to the circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from +5V created by the +5V creation circuit. The noise-removed +5V is supplied to a main control board capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the main control board, and is also supplied to the main control MPU and the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 and the main control board provided in the game board 5 are supplied with power of +5 V, respectively, but in the payout control board 4110, the power of the power supply board 931 is supplied. +5V created by the creating circuit 931d is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, and the like via the payout control filter circuit 951a, whereas the main control board provided in the game board 5 does not show +5V. In the creation circuit, the power supply of +12V to +5V created in the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is created, and +5V created in the main control board provided in the game board 5 is supplied to the main control MPU through the main control filter circuit. It is a power supply system that is used.

[6-3. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 48 will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4110da are created by the +12V power supply line supplied with the +12V DC power supply created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 and the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931. A +5V direct current power supply is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line supplied through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and +12V and +5V are applied thereto. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4110da. It is supposed to be done. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 839. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12V or +5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 839. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of a point of performing control for switching between a case where +12V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage and a case where +5V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th terminal and the 7th terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 839. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function through the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 839, and rotate the payout motor 839. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD60 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 before the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[6-4. Excitation motor excitation system]
Next, the excitation method of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 839, the same one as a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. This small stepping motor is an extremely small stepping motor having an outer diameter of a cylindrical body of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839 which is such a small stepping motor, when the control of the one-phase excitation system capable of exciting the coils of the small stepping motor one by one, the generated torque becomes extremely small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the drive torque and the stationary torque are generated in the payout motor 839, the coil of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be excited in two-phase by two-phase excitation method control. It was adopted. In this two-phase excitation method, the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be excited by two phases each, so that the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited by one phase by one phase excitation. Compared with the method, it is possible to obtain about twice the torque.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by controlling the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the drive torque and the static torque. ing.

[6-5. Drive voltage switching circuit for payout motor]
Next, a circuit for switching the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the payout motor 839, the same one as a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5 is used. This small stepping motor is an extremely small stepping motor having an outer diameter of a cylindrical body of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839 which is such a small stepping motor, no voltage is applied to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 839 in the non-excitation state. In, the output shaft 839a can be rotated with an extremely small torque (the output shaft 839a and the output shaft 839a can be rotated each time the phase is rotated from one phase to the next phase).

As described above, the prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and the rotation of the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a causes the rotation of the prize ball intermediate gear 841. , And is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842. That is, when the payout motor 839 is in the non-excited state, when a voltage is not applied to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 839 and no current flows, an extremely small torque is applied. The output shaft 839a can be rotated by. Therefore, for example, the own weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is applied to the recessed portion 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load causes the sprocket 837 to rotate. To generate torque, and this torque causes the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to rotate. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is not rotated, in order to obtain the stationary torque of the payout motor 839, each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase) of the payout motor 839 is obtained. , /A phase), it is necessary to apply a voltage to flow a current.

In order to obtain the stationary torque of the payout motor 839, it is necessary to always apply the motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, the B phase and the A phase) to maintain a current flowing state. Despite not rotating the output shaft 839a of the motor 839 (in other words, in a state where the player does not pay out the game ball as a prize ball), the output shaft of the payout motor 839 Power is consumed in the same manner as when the 839a is rotated.

Therefore, if the motor drive voltage is always set to a low voltage (for example, +5 V), the power consumption can be suppressed, but this reduces the drive torque of the payout motor 839. The own weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the curved passage 831b formed in the load is applied to the recessed portion 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket 837, and the torque generated thereby increases. Since the drive torque of the payout motor 839 is lost, the sprocket 837 cannot be rotated, and the payout motor 839 loses synchronization. On the other hand, if the motor drive voltage is always a high voltage (for example, +12 V), the drive torque of the payout motor 839 increases, so that the above-mentioned step-out does not occur (that is, in the above-mentioned example. , Even if this load works in the direction of rotating the sprocket 837, the weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 is loaded on the recess 837a formed on the sprocket 837. Since the driving torque of the payout motor 839 exceeds the torque generated thereby, the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor can be transmitted to the sprocket 837 to smoothly rotate the sprocket 837. There is a problem that consumption cannot be suppressed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in the payout control board 4110 is provided with the voltage switching circuit 4110da and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball. The payout control MPU 4110a controls the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage by setting the logic (eg, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. In order to obtain the stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the motor is stopped, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. The supply voltage of +5V is supplied to the payout motor 839.

As a result, when obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, +5V, which is significantly smaller than +12V as the motor drive voltage, is supplied to the payout motor 839. Thus, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of power consumption when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. In addition, since the heat generation of the payout motor 839 can be suppressed to a small level, it can contribute to preventing the temperature rise in the pachinko island facility.

[6-6. Drive voltage to payout motor at power-on and power-off]
Next, the drive voltage to the payout motor 839 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described. As described above, when the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotationally drives the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, while maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. In the case of obtaining the torque, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control the supply of +5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor driving voltage. ..

The payout control MPU 4110a is used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (in addition to turning on the pachinko gaming machine 1, power is restored to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after power is cut off due to a power failure, or pachinko gaming The power-on process, which is a payout control program, is also performed for power recovery to the machine 1 including power recovery in which power is restored after being interrupted by a momentary power failure. When this power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a first sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage. Is output to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and a stationary torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft 839a is generated. This is because when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout motor 839 is not supplied with +5V as the motor drive voltage forcibly but is supplied with +12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. This is because the power consumed by is extremely large. In other words, in the main control board provided in the game board 5 to which the +12V DC power supply created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is provided, +5V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from +12V is created by the +5V creation circuit. Since it has been created, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, in the state where +12V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large and the voltage level of +12V is reached. It becomes difficult to raise +5V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from +12V in the main control board provided in the game board 5 with the +5V generation circuit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU from being unable to start its operation.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, by supplying +5 V, which is set as a low voltage as the motor drive voltage, to the payout motor 839, the power is turned on. Even if +5V becomes unstable at times, it does not exceed the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the payout motor 839. That is, it is also possible to prevent a failure of the payout motor 839 due to an unstable power supply when the power is turned on.

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs an initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60. In the initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60, the initial value of the drive ICPIC 60 is set. As the initial value, information for outputting a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) in order to obtain the stationary torque of the payout motor 839. Is set in the internal register of the output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 4110a.

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a wait timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power supply becomes stable after the power is turned on, and then performs a fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837. In the fixed position setting process for the sprocket 837, it is determined whether or not the sprocket 837 is positioned at the fixed position described above. Specifically, the payout control MPU 4110a is not in the state where the sprocket 837 is located at the above-mentioned fixed position when the detection notch 842b is not detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. In order to switch the motor drive voltage from +5V to +12V, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW to HI) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets information for outputting a payout motor drive signal for rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, in an internal register of an output port incorporated in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output port. When the payout control MPU 4110a detects the detection notch 842b, the payout motor drive signal is output to stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 after rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 by a predetermined rotation angle. The information to be output is set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stops according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output port. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI to LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to switch the sprocket 837 to the fixed position in order to switch the motor driving voltage from +12V to +5V. Keep waiting at. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a payout control main process (a process of receiving and analyzing a command from the main control board provided in the game board 5, a process of setting a main operation regarding payout of a game ball, and an error LED indicator every 2 ms. Processing for creating display data for 953) is repeated. Note that the payout control MPU 4110a determines that the sprocket 837 is in the above-described fixed position when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. The fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837 is finished as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, as well as the case where the power is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary blackout), the payout control MPU 4110a repeats every 2 ms. The process proceeds from the payout control main process to the payout control power-off process. In this payout control power-off process, various information related to payout is stored in the payout control built-in RAM as backup information, and in order to forcibly supply +5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, the logic of the voltage switching signal ( For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and control is performed to generate a stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. As described above, +5V is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a in addition to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, a drive system called the payout motor 839 and a payout control MPU 4110a control. The system and the system are down at the same time. This is because when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, +5V as the motor drive voltage is not forcibly supplied to the payout motor 839, and +12V as the motor drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 839. This is because the power consumed by is extremely large. In other words, in the main control board provided in the game board 5 to which the +12V DC power supply created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is provided, +5V which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from +12V is created by the +5V creation circuit. Since it is created, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, in the state where +12V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large and the voltage level of +12V is reached. As the main control MPU performs a main control power-off process, which is one process of the main control program, to store various information related to games in the main control internal RAM, the main control MPU is activated before it is completed. The control voltage level is also drastically lowered to prevent the main control MPU from becoming inoperable.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 forcibly supplies +5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system of the payout motor 839, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. By supplying the same +5V (that is, +5V which is the operation control voltage is supplied to the control system of the payout control board 4110, ie, the payout control MPU 4110a, and the drive system of the payout motor 839 is supplied. By supplying +5 V as the motor drive voltage), it is possible to match the time when the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 stops operating and the time when the drive system of the payout motor 839 stops operating. It is like this. Thus, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 can be in a state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off in a state where the payout control MPU 4110a grasps the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. That is, the payout motor 839 can be under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 until just before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 from rotating under the influence of the power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[6-7. Timing of switching drive voltage to delivery motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. As described above, when the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotationally drives the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, while maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. In the case of obtaining the torque, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control the supply of +5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor driving voltage. ..

When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates, as described above, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disk 842 to rotate. It is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837 via the gear 844. As described above, on the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, three recesses 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally formed every 120 degrees. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, three recesses 837b into which game balls are fitted are formed equally every 120 degrees, and a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831. The three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the space and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged 60 degrees apart from each other. There is. Each time the sprocket 837 makes one revolution, the game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b can be sent out to the downstream side of a maximum of 6 game balls.

The game ball received by the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831 is sent to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. To be done. The game ball received by the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 is sent to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. To be done.

The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, thereby outputting the payout motor 839. When the game ball is paid out by rotating the shaft 839a to rotate the sprocket 837, and when stopping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is driven to rotate and the sprocket 837. After the game balls received in the recesses 837a, 837b of are finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c, 832c, until the game balls sent out last pass through the prize ball passages 831c, 832c and are detected by the counting switch 838. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven until a required time (a preset time, for example, set to several hundred milliseconds) elapses, and when the time elapses, the payout motor 839a is driven. In order to stop the rotation drive of the output shaft 839a of 839 to stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW) with this as a trigger. By setting a logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputting the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +5 V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 839. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is kept stopped.

Specifically, for example, when the player rotationally operates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is played with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 by the ball launching device 680 shown in FIG. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in FIG. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. .. When a game ball is received in the starting prize hole as a prize hole, a command (prize ball command) for paying out three gaming balls as a prize ball to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 is provided on the game board 5. Is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 from a main control board (not shown) that controls the. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply +12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837, and the first ball, the second ball, and finally the third ball are recessed in the sprocket 837 one by one. After sending the game balls received in 837a, 837b to the prize ball passages 831c, 832c, it takes until the lastly sent third game ball passes through the prize ball passages 831c, 832c and is detected by the counting switch 838. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotationally driven until a time (a preset time, for example, set to several hundred milliseconds) elapses, and when this time elapses, the payout motor 839 To stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW) at this voltage. By setting a logic (for example, LOW) of the switching signal and outputting the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +5V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 839. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is maintained in a stopped state.

Further, as described above, when the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 when stopping the rotational position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position. After the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle, the sprocket 837 is maintained in a standby state by maintaining the drive stopped state. That is, when the payout control MPU 4110a stops the rotational position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position, when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is detected in advance. Although the motor is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle, the "predetermined rotation angle" means +12V as the motor drive voltage by setting the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837 and the game ball is paid out, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. In this case, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven, and the game ball received in the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 is finally sent to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. The payout motor 839 is passed until the time required to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (a preset time, which is set to, for example, several hundred milliseconds). Output shaft 839a is continuously driven to rotate, and when this time elapses, sprocket 837 is rotated until the output motor 839 output shaft 839a is rotationally driven and output motor 839 output shaft 839a is stopped. It corresponds to the rotation angle.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls, and the payout control board box 950 of FIG. And a payout control board 4110 housed in. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in FIG. 64 and a power supply board 931 housed in the power supply board box 930 in FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da sets +12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, and a state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped. It is possible to mutually switch between +5V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining and lower than the drive voltage. The power supply board 931 is capable of producing +12V as a driving voltage and +5V as a stopping voltage.

The payout control board 4110 can be operated by supplying +5V as a stop voltage as an operation control voltage. The payout control board 4110 is a small motor that pays +12V as a driving voltage when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out a game ball. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, can be output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5V as the stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. The payout control board 4110 can output a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to forcibly supply +5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 when the power is turned off.

Specifically, in the case of rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain the drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 uses the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI). ) And output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, while maintaining a stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. In order to obtain, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 sets the logic (eg, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage. It is designed to control. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 drives the motor when the power is cut off (in addition to the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the case where the power is cut off due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure). In order to forcibly supply +5V as the voltage to the payout motor 839, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. The control for generating the stationary torque for maintaining the above is performed.

In this way, by supplying +12V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, It is possible to drive the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, and to supply +5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, stopped.

By the way, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, when the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is in the state of being inactive for the drive system of the payout motor 839 first, the payout motor 839 is paid out. There is a possibility that the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 may rotate due to being out of control by the payout control MPU 4110a. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 forcibly supplies +5V to the payout motor 839 as a stop voltage as a motor drive voltage. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal that is, the control system of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system of the payout motor 839 turn off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the same time, the same +5 V is supplied (that is, to the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110, the operation control voltage +5V is supplied and the payout motor 839 is driven. When +5V is supplied as the stop voltage as the motor drive voltage), the timing at which the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is stopped and the time at which the drive system called the payout motor 839 is stopped. , Can be matched. Thus, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 can be in a state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off in a state where the payout control MPU 4110a grasps the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. That is, the payout motor 839 can be under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 until just before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 from rotating under the influence of the power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a motor operates a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-119670).

By the way, in recent game machines, a game board is provided with a plurality of movable bodies, and each movable body is operated to provide the player with a powerful effect by the movable bodies. For this reason, in recent game machines, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board, and a small stepping motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not become large. Cost is suppressed by unifying the stepping motors of the same type.

In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out game balls is also provided with a payout motor. The rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket for paying out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

If a small stepping motor is used as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small stepping motor can be rotated with extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small stepping motor. The output shaft of a small stepping motor rotates due to the load on the sprocket due to its own weight. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small stepping motor to pass a current in order to obtain the static torque of the small stepping motor even when the output shaft of the small stepping motor is not rotating. is there.

However, if the voltage applied to the small stepping motor is a low voltage, the power consumption can be suppressed, but with this, the driving torque of the small stepping motor becomes small, so that the sprocket is moved to the sprocket by its own weight. Since the load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket and the driving torque of the small stepping motor is lost to the torque generated by this, it becomes impossible to rotate the sprocket, and on the other hand, it is applied to the small stepping motor. If a high voltage is used as the voltage, the driving torque of the small-sized payout motor becomes large, and even if the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the torque generated by this causes a small stepping motor. Since the driving torque of the small stepping motor can be transmitted, the rotation of the output shaft of the small stepping motor can be transmitted to the sprocket to rotate the sprocket. It was extremely difficult to adopt a motor.

Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to be able to employ a small stepping motor as the payout motor.

More specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 shown in FIG. 48, which is a small stepping motor for paying out game balls. The payout control board 4110 housed in the payout control board box 950 of No. 4 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d shown in FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stopped +12V as a drive voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor. The voltage for maintaining the state and +5V as the stop voltage, which is lower than the drive voltage, can be switched to each other.

The payout control board 4110 uses a small stepping motor to drive +12V as a driving voltage when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out a game ball. In order to supply to a certain payout motor 839, a voltage switching signal that is a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and at the same time, control is performed by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited by two phases. On the other hand, in order to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the delivery motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, in a stopped state, +5V as a stop voltage is supplied to the delivery motor 839, which is a small stepping motor. In order to supply the voltage, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and control is performed by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited by two phases. There is.

Specifically, in the case of rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. By controlling the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the two-phase excitation method for exciting the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, every two phases is performed. On the other hand, in order to obtain the stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and sets the voltage switching circuit 4110da. By controlling the supply of +5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, the two-phase excitation method for exciting the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, every two phases is performed. ing.

In this way, by supplying +12V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. A drive torque for paying out a game ball can be obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, and +5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. By supplying the static torque, it is possible to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, in a stopped state. Then, by supplying +12V as a drive voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is rotationally driven to generate a drive torque for paying out the game ball. In the case of obtaining, or by supplying +5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is maintained. Even in the case of obtaining, by controlling the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited every two phases, for example, a small stepping motor Since the torque generated by the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be increased as compared with the one-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 839 are excited one by one, the driving torque and the static torque can be reduced. Can be large.

As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the drive torque by controlling the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by the two-phase excitation method. Therefore, for example, the prize ball shown in FIG. The weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the bending passage 831b formed in the front box 831 is loaded on the recess 837a formed on the sprocket 837, and this load causes the sprocket 837 to rotate by the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. Even if it works in the rotation direction opposite to the driven rotation direction, the driving torque of the payout motor 839 exceeds the torque generated thereby, so that the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is transmitted to the sprocket 837 to cause the sprocket 837 to move. It can be rotated smoothly. Then, by controlling the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the static torque, and therefore, for example, the prize ball table shown in FIG. Even if this load acts in the direction to rotate the sprocket 837 by the own weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the box 831 being loaded on the recessed portion 837a formed in the sprocket 837, this occurs Since the static torque of the payout motor 839 exceeds the torque to be generated, the state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is stopped can be maintained, and the state in which the sprocket 837 is stopped can be maintained. Therefore, a small stepping motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. In addition, it is possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the gaming machine by adopting, as the payout motor 839, the same type of small stepping motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a motor operates a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-119670).

By the way, in recent game machines, a game board is provided with a plurality of movable bodies, and each movable body is operated to provide the player with a powerful effect by the movable bodies. For this reason, in recent game machines, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board. A small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not become large, and each small Cost is suppressed by unifying the motors of the same type.

In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out game balls is also provided with a payout motor. The rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket for paying out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

If a small motor is used as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small motor can be rotated with an extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small motor. The load on the sprocket causes the output shaft of the small motor to rotate. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small motor in order to obtain a static torque of the small motor even when the output shaft of the small motor is not rotated.

However, if a low voltage is applied to the small motor, the power consumption can be suppressed, but with this, the driving torque of the small motor becomes small, so that the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball is reduced. The sprocket operates in the direction of rotation, and the driving torque of the small motor is lost to the torque generated by this, so it becomes impossible to rotate the sprocket, while the high voltage applied to the small motor is high. Then, since the driving torque of the small payout motor becomes large, even if the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball works in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the driving torque of the small motor exceeds the torque generated by this. Therefore, although the rotation of the output shaft of the small motor can be transmitted to the sprocket to rotate the sprocket, this makes it impossible to suppress the power consumption, and it is extremely difficult to use a small motor as the payout motor. It was difficult.

Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to be able to employ a small motor as the payout motor.

More specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 shown in FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls. The payout control board 4110 housed in the payout control board box 950 of FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a counting switch 838 in FIG. 48 and a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in FIG. 64. The counting switch 838 is capable of detecting the game ball dispensed by rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. The voltage switching circuit 4110da sets +12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, and a state in which the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped. It is possible to mutually switch between +5V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining and lower than the drive voltage.

The payout control board 4110 is a small motor, in which +12V as a driving voltage is a small motor when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for paying out a game ball. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

Specifically, in the case of rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. In order to control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage by outputting the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs the voltage switching signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply +5V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage.

Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +12V as a driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor to output the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. In the case of paying out the game balls by rotating and driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is rotationally driven. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, continues to be rotationally driven until the time required for the gaming ball paid out lastly to be detected by the counting switch 838 elapses. A control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to switch from +12V as a driving voltage to +5V as a stopping voltage and supply it to a payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

Specifically, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputs the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to thereby control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage. When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837 and the game ball is paid out, and when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated. After the game ball that has been driven and received in the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 is finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. 7, A game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in Fig. 7 with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 by the shown ball launching device 680. Then, it is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the received winning holes. Is accepted, a command (prize ball command) for paying out only three game balls as prize balls to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 is provided on the game board 5 from a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the payout control board 4110. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 sets +12V as a motor drive voltage by setting the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. By controlling the supply to 839, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket 837, and the 1st game ball, the 2nd game ball, and finally the 3rd game. After sending the game balls received in the recesses 837a, 837b of the sprocket 837 one by one to the prize ball passages 831c, 832c), the game ball finally sent out (in the above-mentioned example, the game balls are 3 as the prize balls). When only the balls are paid out, the time required for the last game ball to be sent out is the third game ball, which is detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (which is a preset time). The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is continuously driven to rotate until, for example, several hundred milliseconds are set, and when this time elapses, the output of the payout motor 839 is output. In order to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW) by stopping the rotation drive of the shaft 839a and stopping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, this voltage switching signal Is set (for example, LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to supply +5V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, thereby generating a static torque to the payout motor 839 and issuing the payout motor 839. The state in which the output shaft 839a of 839 is stopped is maintained.

In this way, by supplying +12V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, It is possible to drive the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, and to supply +5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, stopped. Then, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and +12V as a driving voltage is supplied to the discharging motor 839 which is a small motor to supply a discharging motor which is a small motor. When the output shaft 839a of 839 is rotationally driven to pay out the game balls, and when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is stopped. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is continuously driven to rotate until the time required until the gaming ball finally paid out by the rotation switch is detected by the counting switch 838 elapses, and this time elapses. With this as an opportunity, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to switch from +12V as the driving voltage to +5V as the stopping voltage, which is a small-sized motor. It is supplied to 839. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. In addition, it is possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the game machine by adopting the same type of small motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5 as the payout motor 839.

Further, specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, payout control is performed by rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 of FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls. The payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 of FIG. 4 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d shown in FIG. This voltage switching circuit 4110da is a state in which +12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor are stopped. +5V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining the voltage, which is lower than the driving voltage, can be switched to each other.

The payout control board 4110 is a small motor, in which +12V as a driving voltage is a small motor when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for paying out a game ball. While outputting a voltage switching signal which is a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supplying to the motor 839, a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply +5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

Specifically, in the case of rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. In order to control the supply of +12V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage by outputting the voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, while obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs the voltage switching signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply +5V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage.

In this way, by supplying +12V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, It is possible to drive the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a motor, to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, and to supply +5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a stationary torque for keeping the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, stopped. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. In addition, it is possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the game machine by adopting the same type of small motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5 as the payout motor 839.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a motor operates a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-119670).

By the way, in recent game machines, a game board is provided with a plurality of movable bodies, and each movable body is operated to provide the player with a powerful effect by the movable bodies. For this reason, in recent game machines, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body on the game board. A small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board does not become large, and each small Cost is suppressed by unifying the motors of the same type.

In addition to the game board, for example, a payout device for paying out game balls is also provided with a payout motor. The rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket for paying out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means). In the state where the control for stopping the rotation of the sprocket is being performed by the payout control board (payout control means), the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the sprocket by the succeeding game ball being connected to the game ball received by the sprocket. The state will be maintained.

However, when a small motor is adopted as the payout motor, the stationary torque of the small motor is extremely small, so even if the control for stopping the rotation of the sprocket is performed by the payout control board (payout control means), When the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the ball exceeds the static torque of the small motor, the sprocket may rotate due to the load due to the weight of the game ball. For this reason, conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to employ a large motor having a large static torque as a payout motor, and it has been extremely difficult to employ a small motor.

Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to be able to employ a small motor as the payout motor.

More specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control board box 950 of FIG. 4 for performing payout control of the payout device 830 of FIG. The payout control board 4110 is provided. The dispensing device 830 has a curved passage 831b that forms a spherical passage formed by the pair of curved passage walls 831a shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b) as a spherical passage formed in the front, and a spherical passage formed in the rear. The pair of bending passage walls 832a in FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b) is a bending passage 832b forming a ball passage, and the game balls passing through the bending passages 832b are formed into two rows.

The dispensing device 830 includes at least a dispensing motor 839 shown in FIG. 48 and a sprocket 837 shown in FIG. 48, which are small motors. The payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is an electric drive source, and the sprocket 837 is capable of rotating by the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor.

In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, one game ball that passes through a curved passage 831b that constitutes a spherical passage is formed by a pair of curved passage walls 831a shown in FIGS. A certain number of front recesses that can be formed are provided, and a game ball that passes through a curved passage 832b that forms a spherical passage by a pair of curved passage walls 832a as shown in FIGS. Is provided with a certain number of rear concave portions capable of receiving one ball.

Specifically, a sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged in a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three recesses 837a into which game balls fit are formed at equal intervals of 120 degrees. A ball delivery space 832k is also formed in the prize ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. In this ball delivery space 832k, a sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged. On the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three recesses 837b into which game balls are fitted are formed equally every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 have the three ball recess spaces 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. Are arranged on the front side of the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837. Further, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three sprockets 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832. The recesses 837b and the recesses 837b are arranged so as to be offset from each other by 60 degrees.

When the payout motor 839, which is a small-sized motor, is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 4110, a sphere passage formed in front of the ridge line that is the boundary between the sprocket 837 and the front concave portion as shown in FIG. ), (b) is set in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b forming the ball passage by the pair of curved passage walls 831a, so that the weight of the gaming ball is loaded on the sprocket 837 in one rotation direction. On the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the rear concave portion, a spherical passage is formed by the pair of curved passage walls 832a shown in FIGS. By setting the state of receiving the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b, the weight of the game ball is loaded on the sprocket 837 in the other rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

Specifically, when the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, as shown in FIG. 53A, the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a. 53 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 as well as being in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion with As shown in b), the payout control board is in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. It is controlled by 4110. As a result, the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recessed portion 837a shown in FIG. In addition, in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the prize ball back box 832 is formed on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b shown in FIG. 53(b). When the sprocket 837 is maintained in a fixed position by receiving the game ball passing through the curved passage 832b, the weight of the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 is the sprocket. A direction in which the sprocket 837 is rotated clockwise with respect to the ridge line that is a boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of 837 and the recess 837a when the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side (clockwise direction in FIG. 53A). While a load can be applied to the game ball, the weight of the game ball passing through the bending passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. When viewed from the front side of the dispensing device 830, the sprocket 837 is in a state in which a load can be applied in a direction in which the sprocket 837 is rotated counterclockwise (clockwise in FIG. 53B).

In this manner, when the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 4110, it is formed forward on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a as the front concave portion. 51(a) and 51(b) as a ball passage, the weight of the game ball is sprocket 837 when the game ball passing through the curved passage 831b forming the ball passage is received by the pair of bent passage walls 831a. Is loaded in one rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side), and is rearward on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b as the rear concave portion. 52(a) and (b) as a ball passage formed in FIG. 52B, the self-weight of the game ball is set by receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b forming the ball passage by the pair of bent passage walls 832a. The sprocket 837 rotates in a counterclockwise direction (the rotation direction of the dispensing device 830 is clockwise when viewed from the front side) and the other rotation direction (counterclockwise direction when the dispensing device 830 is viewed from the front side). Direction). As a result, the sprocket 837 is loaded in one rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise when the payout device 830 is viewed from the front side) by the weight of the game ball, and at the same time, the one rotation direction (the payout device 830 is turned on). By being loaded in the other rotation direction (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front side), which is the opposite direction to the direction in which the rotation is performed clockwise when viewed from the front side, Since the rotations in the rotation direction can cancel each other, even if a small motor having a static torque extremely smaller than the static torque of a large motor is adopted as the payout motor 839, the payout control can be performed. When the payout motor 839 is stop-controlled by the substrate 4110, the sprocket 837 can be maintained in a stopped state. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. Further, by adopting, as the payout motor 839, the same type as a small motor that operates a movable body provided in the game board 5, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor MPU4110a controls the voltage switching circuit 4110a and the drive ICPIC 60 included in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d shown in FIG. 64 to be a small motor (small stepping motor). Although the control for generating the drive torque or the stationary torque of 839 is performed, such a circuit and control should be applied to a small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5. You can

[7. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control board 4140 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, while the peripheral control unit 4150 performs detection control of the contact state of the touch panel 246, and the game board side liquid crystal. Drawing control of the display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is performed, and sound control of music, sound effects, and the like played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 is performed. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 equipped with a VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC") that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. ) A volume control volume that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4, and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. 4140a (first volume operating means). The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal/sound control unit 4160 may be separate bodies as illustrated, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 may be performed by the liquid crystal and VDP 4160a with the built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160, or vice versa.

[7-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information inherited over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and light emission of various LEDs) Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for managing schedule data etc. defining aspects, and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state and special Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing various production flags, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. WDT4150e").

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the peripheral power RAM 4150c is in a state in which the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power cut occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from an unillustrated large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 851. By doing so, the stored contents are retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer hold and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is tie-mapped, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that it is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The lighting data of the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is output from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) to the lamp. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. 5. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of No. 5 is output from the peripheral I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED peripheral control. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401, which is provided in the operation unit 400, and a pressing detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, are detected. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. I am diagnosing whether or not.

[7-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as the center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral control various serial I. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak are read/written via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b through the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. The DMA0 is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 4150ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. In order to independently perform data transfer between the input/output device such as the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. Further, while reading and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and Reading/writing is performed on the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, without passing through peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h, while various peripheral control various types are performed. For the input/output devices such as the serial I/O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I/O ports, motor drive board serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port, a main control substrate serial I/O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The watchdog timer with built-in peripheral control (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and if this timer is tie-mapped, it will be reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is time-mapped). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count, and thus is not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a, or the upper decoration of the door frame 5. It outputs a lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 are controlled by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. Music and sound effects can be played from the provided speaker. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player. ) Is also emitted from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without any dependence, and adjusts the volume from mute to the maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 are closed. Although the sound produced by the speaker provided in the frame 5 and the effect sound such as the sound effect are reduced, the volume is high when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is cheating (this embodiment). Then, the notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating by the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and also to make the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 more powerful, or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter referred to as “individual information”). "Regulated individual information") is stored in advance (effect control storage unit). The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, the track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the LED type backlight is mounted on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900. , The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM that is built in the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and that receives power backup even during a power failure Then, the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set, is included, and for example, the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. When December has already passed, corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of 1900 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted in brightness and turned on.

[7-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 61, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, the backup target. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 4150cf that stores only information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. As for the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the main control board 4100 (power-on) is started. A power-on command (see FIG. 69) output by the command output means) instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 57 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Zero is cleared when the operation switch 952 shown is used to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 952 is operated.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (various information that is updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the liquid crystal and sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, is input. 1fr), Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following 0 means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Since a V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame). From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effects described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and thus “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And “Bank4” (also used for production information (1 ms) and production backup information (1 ms) described later with the same meaning).

In Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa has game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a storage area to be set, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is provided. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for output is a storage area, and the received command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and sets the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae is a main control board. 4100 is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from (the main control MPU 4100a thereof). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and history information A storage area 4150caj and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is set. The memory drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is a game board for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. Further, the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is set with various kinds of information obtained from the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a storage area that is stored in the operation unit 400. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. And the like (for example, rotation history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405). Etc.) is the storage area to be set. On the other hand, in the history information storage area 4150caj, an operation history storage area is formed in addition to the display history storage area described later. In this operation history storage area, information regarding “specified handwriting” is stored in advance as an example of a specified contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (effect control storage means). The information regarding the prescribed handwriting includes, for example, a straight line or a curved line and at least one of a change in thickness and a change in drawing speed due to an increase or decrease in writing pressure during drawing.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the Bank 0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is set to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the peripheral control unit regular processing this time, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control section steady process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Is becoming

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Then, when the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the performance information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content that is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb manages two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, which is managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes high-speed copying, and the programs for executing high-speed copying by these peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 69) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). It is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 57 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. “Bank” is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, as described above. The following 0 means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and thus "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank 4” (the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store a copy of the effect information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM) that is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) peripheral control DMA every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2. LCD and sound controller]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and sounds such as music and sound effects that are output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs control includes a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “internal sound source”), and a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and A VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for performing drawing control of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. A liquid crystal that stores various character data (or sprite data with sprite numbers) as display contents displayed in the display area (second display area) of FIG. A sound ROM 4160b (effect control storage means) and an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are provided.

Further, in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, for example, ring-shaped image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image to be described later, and an operation menu background image to be described later. Operation menu background image data used for, the selected display object image data used for displaying at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display of the main body frame rear face image 740C for displaying the main body frame rear face image 740C in which the position of each part on the rear face of the main body frame 4 is visible to the player, the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for displaying, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. It should be noted that the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b includes not only suggestion display object image data used for display of a suggestion display object described later for prompting the user to operate the display button displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, The touch reminder display object data used for displaying the touch reminder display object described later to be displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 to urge the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is stored (data storage. means).

Further, in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, the display size is changed to the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display apparatus 1900 and the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display apparatus 244. The size-converted image data used to display the common images are stored in advance (effect control storage means).

In the peripheral control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set to 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the V blank signal is input, and the first data is stored according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
The sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) includes a built-in RAM capable of temporarily storing data in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source. As a part of such a built-in RAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a includes a material image RAM capable of temporarily storing material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwriting a large number of material image data.

Further, when the screen data included in the screen generation schedule data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a part of the internal RAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is shown in FIG. 62 based on the input screen data. As described above, the game board side character data and the upper plate side character data are respectively extracted from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b, and the game board side sprite data and the upper plate side sprite data (hereinafter, simply referred to as "sprite data") are created to play the game. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated for display on the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is stored, and one screen (one frame) is further used for image processing. VRAM for storing drawing data of (minute) is also built in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM (frame buffer thereof), and also serves as the upper plate side. By outputting the image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a becomes Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b to create sprite data, and one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (one frame). Min.) drawing data is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side liquid crystal is also output. Image data for the display device 244 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In other words, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in the built-in VRAM. It is the data to be generated above. In the following description, extracting (reading) character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b to create sprite data is also abbreviated as “reading sprite data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b”.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer system" holds drawing data for one screen (for one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In this embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

Further, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output is used according to the output channel number. A channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the built-in sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is transmitted to the data transmission IC 4160c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker volume 920 provided in the main body frame 4. The volume of the loudspeaker housed in and the loudspeaker provided in the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually stored in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4. Amplify to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the housed speaker and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, serialize the amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. , The sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, and the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume is totally independent of the adjustment, and the synthesized volume of the notification sound is actually output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is amplified to a master volume value that is a flowing volume, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 malfunctions or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is fraudulent. To briefly explain the control of sending the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the action, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesis is performed. The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, The amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is the above-described sound generation schedule. It is proceeding according to the data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and this predetermined period. When the time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to silence is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to adjust the substrate volume. It is set again as a value (at this time, if the display button is operated to move to the setting mode and is adjusted, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound), and is provided in the main body frame 4. The speaker is housed in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected. When a notification sound is played to notify a clerk of the hall of a misconduct, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the door frame 5. Although the muffled sound that is played from the speaker progresses in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 after the notification sound has passed the predetermined period. When the sound does not flow from the speaker provided in the frame 5, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[7-2b. LCD and sound ROM]
As shown in FIG. 62, the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is used to draw game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left-side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 60, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (timekeeping storage unit) that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply (second power supply) for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, the RTC 4165a updates and holds the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. The battery 4165b supplies electric power (second electric power) in addition to the main power supply (first electric power) that supplies electric power (first electric power), triggered by the reception of a power failure warning signal described later. The supply of electric power (second electric power) may be stopped when the supply of electric power from the main power supply is started. In such a power supply form, the RTC 4165a uses the main power supply or the battery 4165b. Power is supplied from.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and sets them in the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears appears on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the plate side liquid crystal display device 244, or on New Year's Eve, it is the New Year. The screen for executing the countdown to reach the counter can be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment. The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC controller 4165 will be described in detail later, but the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power failure detection signal output as the power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (from the first time) to the periphery. The time until the time (second time) when the control board 4140 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 4100, that is, the information about the power failure time is stored.

On the other hand, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of an LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held. ing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with the LED type. . The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the LED brightness, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set game. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information are stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as the information of the year, month, day, and hour, minute, second. Input date information is also stored.

Peripheral control MPU4150a, if the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is of the cold cathode tube type, the ON/OFF switching control of the backlight or ON It is supposed to be only.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of an LED type, input date information, and the like. , And stores and holds information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state with low probability or high probability).

Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode and the brightness of the backlight is adjusted to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing the demonstration, the setting mode is performed. The screen is adapted to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a desired value. The brightness can be adjusted. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is the LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is mounted. A decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the input date/time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date/time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date/time. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, an additional 85% of the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob to adjust the volume of music or sound effect that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. To adjust. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is pivotally operated, and the peripherally controlled A/D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the knob portion 4140a serves as a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) are controlled so that the sound volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker.

As described above, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music or sound is output from the speaker (sound output unit) housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5. The sound effect is playing. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to game production (for example, there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or that the game state advantageous to the player will be entered). A notification sound for notifying, etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are rotated by the knob operation. The volume is controlled without depending on the volume adjustment based on the above, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program (corresponding to a production control program described later) is different from the above-described seven-level substrate volume, and as shown in FIGS. It can be changed and set. As a result, for example, when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, a speaker (sound output unit) housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and Although the effect sound such as music or sound effect that flows from the speaker (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is cheating. The notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, for example, the maximum volume set by software) can be played regardless of the turning operation of the knob. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating by the player due to the notification sound.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 be more powerful, in addition to the music and the sound effect by increasing the volume of the sound. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music or sound effect by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, for example, the dial operation section 401 of the operation unit 400 is used. By operating the or pressing operation unit 405, the mode is shifted to the setting mode and the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing the demonstration, the setting mode is performed. The screen is adapted to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is Then, the value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and the effect sound is changed. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operating unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume, so if the clerk in the hall feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, and when the volume of the clerk in the hall feels loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 is operated. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, 10 times). ), the volume adjusted by the player who was seated on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, when the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and playing a game feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[7-5. Touch panel module and its periphery]
FIG. 65 shows an example of signal exchange between the touch panel module 246a and its peripheral portion.
A touch panel 246, which will be described later, is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 in addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 and receives the detection signal, the peripheral control board 4140 grasps the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 according to the contact information based on the detection signal. be able to.

The touch panel module 246a (control means) is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 connected to the main control board 4100, and controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The touch panel module 246a includes a touch sensor 482 and a touch panel controller 481 having the following control register 481a. That is, the control register 481a can store a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance threshold value when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state (determination threshold value storage unit).

The touch sensor 482 measures the capacitance before and after the change when the change in the capacitance at any position on the contact surface is detected, and at the same time, indicates the coordinates of the position and the capacitance. A detection signal is output as a signal indicating the capacitance (contact detection means). When the touch panel controller 481 receives the detection signal, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a coordinate value (hereinafter, referred to as “detection coordinate value”) representing the position or the range thereof, while the capacitance (hereinafter, referred to as “detection electrostatic capacitance”) indicated by the detection signal. “Capacity”) is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a. As a result of such comparison, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold value, it determines that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, while the detected capacitance is When it is determined that the contact surface is equal to or more than the contact determination threshold value, it is determined that the contact surface is in the contact state (contact state determination means).

When the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

By the way, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, generally, a sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then the device operates at the sensitivity (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-192783, hereinafter. "First reference"). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance, depending on the game environment thereafter. Here, for example, a capacitance type touch panel is superior in durability as compared with a low-hard film type touch panel, but since the peak point of the capacitance change is recognized as a touch point, variations in sensitivity in the manufacturing process may occur. Also, it is necessary to adjust the contact sensitivity, which changes in response to changes in the environment, to be uniform and constant.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the touch panel module 246a receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the outside (for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140), the touch sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is adjusted. To do. That is, in the touch panel module 246a, when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the touch determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated based on this threshold setting command, thereby the touch panel The contact sensitivity by 246 is adjusted. Specifically, when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time the contact state is detected as described above, and When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold value, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold value, Judge that the contact surface is in contact.

Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

By doing so, the touch panel controller 481 updates the contact determination threshold value that determines the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by receiving a threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) from the outside. Therefore, if the output timing of the threshold value setting command is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) is adjusted at a desired timing (calibration). Therefore, if the threshold setting command arrives at an output timing that may affect the game played by the player, the touch state on the touch panel 246 can always be detected appropriately without affecting the game. It can be an operating mode.

As the timing at which the touch panel controller 481 should receive the threshold setting command, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the variable display of the special symbol has ended, and the player has stopped the game. It is possible to exemplify the timing when the possibility of touching the operation surface of the touch panel 246 is low. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the variation display of the special symbol that may perform the effect using the touch panel 246, and is performed along with the end of the variation display. There is.

On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the electrostatic capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 which can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity, but is required even after the power is turned on. Since sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing in response to it, it is erroneously detected as a change in capacitance even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. Hard to do.

[8. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. 68 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 69 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 69 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301, When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected to the lower plate 302 (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 68(a). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. In the command 10H, one prize ball is provided. The command 11H designates two prize balls, the command 1EH designates 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 839 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 68(b), payout from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., Command In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 839 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies self-check. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display, test related, and other. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status ( STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing a variation of the effect.

As the status (STTS value) and mode (MODE value), the values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM are used. That is, of the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the command can be decomposed in bit units to grasp the status and mode.

[8-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 57, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 69, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the first special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is a command for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for specifying a deviant, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. Command. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is a command for instructing transition to at least one of the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the special symbol 1 variation, the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the special figure 1 The synchronization effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process described later (command transmission means).

[8-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 57, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 69, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the second special symbol display 1186 of No. 2, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B*H” is assigned as the status and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 69, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts while the big winning opening 1 is open in the 1st to 16th rounds (the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is shown). It is for instructing the opening of the Nth round or opening), and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during closing of the special winning opening 1 (between rounds of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). It is an instruction to close or start closing, and the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates to the special winning opening 2103 that the count 0 to 10 has been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 57). The number of gaming balls entered) is transmitted, the big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is an instruction to display the big hit symbol information.

The small hit opening command is for instructing to start the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, opening or opening of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2110). The small hit count display command is for the small hit medium big prize opening winning effect (when the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start a small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). When the winning opening 2103 is opened in the Nth round), the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 starts to be closed). The winning prize 1 count display command is counted when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game balls entered in the special winning opening 2103 are counted. When it is detected by the switch 2110), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). To be done.

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 69, the category of turning on the power is composed of various commands having the name of turning on the power. In this power-on command, "D*H" is assigned as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of turning on the power). Is).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, at the time of returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated, a main control side power-on process described later. Is executed and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[8-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 shown in FIG. 57, and its classification is, as shown in FIG. 69, the normal symbol display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. 57. Concerning the device 1189, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization production start, general pattern designation, general figure synchronization production end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “E*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The general figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying the off, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation time) is transmitted, and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2105 which are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called "Ending". A status of “F*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery opening display command is for starting the universal battery opening (a pair of movable pieces 2105 is expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105). The normal command ending command is used to instruct the ending of the universal drawing ending command.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted at the start of the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (the pair of movable pieces 2105 are driven by the starting opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the notification display category is made up of commands such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The prize abnormality display command is when the player enters the big winning 2103 mouth other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) (the game ball enters the big winning mouth 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even when the big hit is not made). When the ball is detected by the count switch 2110), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, for instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The display command is, for example, when the main control board 4100 is electrically disconnected or short-circuited in any one of the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is for instructing the start of abnormality display, and is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024.

The door frame opening command is issued in a state where the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110. In some cases, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is a state in which the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this case, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110. In some cases, the main frame opening command is issued, and the main frame closing command indicates that the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. In some cases, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, a prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won at the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. Any of the above is transmitted when any one of them is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door frame opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in the state of being opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The door frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 70, “7*H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 70, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. Is shown, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140. As such a test command, for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. The command to perform the inspection can be mentioned.

In this main control board 4100, a port for a test command is assigned each time for the convenience of the hardware side, so that instead of a mode that is difficult to manage on the hardware side, a port for a test command is used for easy management on the software side. As for ports, those that can be managed by a software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, and those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to a specific port.

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, at the time of returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated, a main control side power-on process described later. Is executed and the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 70, starting mouth winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and The special symbol 2 includes a command named memory prefetching effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022. , The start of the production when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is The high-probability end designation command is for instructing a state transition from the shortened operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and the high-probability end designation command is from a high-probability state (corresponding to a probability variation state described later) to a low-probability state (normal game state described later, etc.). It corresponds to the state transition to), the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol storage command), special symbol 1 hold 0-4 (the game ball enters the first starting port 2101 function The first special symbol display device 1185 of the display board 1191 conveys the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 storage command (special symbol storage command) is a special 0 to 4 symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2102 and the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 (the number of reserves) )), the normal symbol storage command is 0-4 normal symbols 1 hold (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the normal symbol display on the function display substrate 1191 is displayed as a variable display of the normal symbol. The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command (advance determination instruction command) is the first special symbol display device 1185 of the special symbol 1 holding function display board 1191. In advance to be used for variable display of the special symbol, the pre-reading effect is instructed to pre-read before the display of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold, and the special symbol 2 The memory prefetch effect command (preceding determination instruction command), the special symbol 2 hold is prefetched before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1186 of the function display board 1191, and the special symbol 2 is held. Based on this, the second special symbol display device 1186 is used to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect for notifying the advance notice of the display result. In the present embodiment, these special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command are collectively referred to as "storage pre-reading effect command".

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting mouth 2101 based on a detection signal from the first starting mouth switch 3022, or When the game ball enters the second starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. The command provided for the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is transmitted mainly by voice from the speaker provided in the door frame 5 as shown in FIG. The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the discontinuation stop period) after the fluctuation is determined, which has consumed the high-probability number in the case of “high probability N times”, Special symbol 1 storage command, when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (the game ball enters the first starting port 2101 and the first special symbol display device 1185 of the function display board 1191 is still in the variable display of the special symbol. In the state where there is a number of reserves that are not used, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2101 and the number of reserves increases, the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 from the number of reserves. It is transmitted to when the number of holdings is reduced), and the special symbol 2 memory command is a special symbol 2 operation holding number of balls changing (a game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 and the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a pending number which is not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 and the pending number increases, or It is transmitted from the number of reserves when the second special symbol display 1186 is used for variable display of special symbols to reduce the number of reserves), and the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 operation reserve ball number change (gate unit). In the state where the game ball passes through 2350 and the number of holdings which is not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191, the number of holdings of the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2350. Is increased, or when the number of reservations is reduced and the number of reservations is reduced by using the normal symbol display unit 1189 for the variable display of the ordinary symbols, and the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is the special symbol 1 operation. When the number of reserved balls is increased (when the number of game balls entered the first starting opening 2101 and the number of reserved balls is increased), the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number is increased (the first Second start When a game ball enters the mouth 2102 and the number of holdings increases, it is transmitted. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is, when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022, or the second starting opening). When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109), mainly from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Although it is transmitted to notify that effect by voice, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 60 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity, in addition to voice notification from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is also designed to be used for. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 There are also specifications that do not notify by voice.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a counting switch error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1; The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) in the retry error. Here, the “count switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the count switch 838 occurs. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 74 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit used for determining an initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for determining initial value for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second Random display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variation on the special symbol display device 1186, and the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display when the big hit game state is generated. A big hit symbol random number used to determine the big hit symbol derived and displayed by the device 1186, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number, and the like are prepared. The random numbers for the big hit symbols described above are used for determining the small hit symbols that are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 when the small hit game state is generated. It is also used as a random number. On the other hand, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol, which is used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for determining whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and for determining an initial value of the normal random number for determining a symbol. Normal symbol per determination determination initial value determination random number, and a normal symbol variable display pattern random number used for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is normally displayed in a variable manner on the regular symbol display device 1189.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is configured by hardware built in the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0. Up to a value 32767) as the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value (value 0) toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the same method as the update method of the random number for big hit determination described above.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, as described above, for the big hit determination initial value determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof is the main control side power-off processing (power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM such as when the stored checksum value (sum value) does not match, the main control MPU4100a includes the big value determination initial value determination random number. The ID code is extracted from the non-volatile RAM, and the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code is executed. The fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived by using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the whole area of the main control internal RAM, the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value as described above and the two-step security measure of are taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the taken-out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for illegally acquiring and updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value can be grasped, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value match is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless on another game board, that is, another pachinko game machine, so the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing is obtained. Even if aiming for a starting winning prize in which a momentary blackout is generated at each interval and a game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 at each predetermined interval, the jackpot gaming state cannot be generated. ..

[9-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
The initial value update type counter fetches an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when RAM is cleared), and based on the fetched ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value in the first cycle. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained in the lottery to the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the value obtained in the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value obtained from the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the value 0 as the minimum value to the value 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. It is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 is set at a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 is set at a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random number values to be a big hit (random number for big hit determination) is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random number values to be a big hit (random number for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values to be acquired at the same time is 200 unless the acquisition time of random number values is different. Other than this, for example, it is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the random number for jackpot determination is different in acquisition timing of the random number value (for example, the value of the random number for jackpot game mode determination acquired when a game ball passes through a gate 2575 described later). , It is possible that the number of random numbers to be a big hit is not a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, a big hit determination random number of the number (50) obtained by dividing the number (200) of big hit symbols with low probability by 4.

Considering the case where such a range of big hit judgment value is set, the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. The value is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between and. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the former period has a much lower probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value updating type counter becomes 0 to the last value (the value 209 for the low probability and the value 339 for the high probability) in the range of the large hit determination values (the big hit determination range). And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter one. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is improperly acquired by some method at the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, and a radio wave is radiated toward the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. When an improper act of pretending to have entered the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is set to one of the ranges of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability that

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value side, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, it is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period from the time of reaching the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). Comparing the above items with each other, the former period has a much higher probability of being selected by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). When comparing the range from the first value (low probability value 32668, high probability value 31768) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, any of the values will be set as the value randomly selected by the initial value selection process, and will be set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. It will count up and then count up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , The value obtained from the lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) to the maximum value side. When the value is set to a range closer to the value, the value (low value) before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0. The period leading up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, a game ball is obtained by illicitly acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and radiating a radio wave toward the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to have entered the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the big hit judging value (big hit judging range). , The probability of being any value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) to the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. In the third cycle from the time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the fourth cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. As described above, in the initial value updating type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) (periodicity The player will not be able to detect it.

[10. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. To do. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer and stacks the contents of the register, the return address, etc. on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S10, the main control program starts the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 25 (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing +24V and the reference voltage or comparing +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

If there is no input of the power failure warning signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, with its logic being HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a. Entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure advance notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

Subsequent to step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 4100a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 952 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 when the operation switch 952 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. In this state (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when erasing game information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer processing 2, the system for controlling the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 19 is activated ( Waiting until it boots). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in main power supply side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S32). In this setting, the value 0 is set in the backup flag BK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The term "power recovery" means that the power is turned off, the power is turned on, the power is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and the high frequency is detected and reset. It also includes the state of returning after that.

Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program is executing the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU4100a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the thumb values do not match, or the main control side power off processing When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the jackpot determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determination random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number described above.

Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, the power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 35 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and the peripheral The test commands divided into the test related shown in FIG. 36 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program sets an interrupt permission (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control program outputs an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 952, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing error notification associated with an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 952 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storage unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the payout operation of the ball.

Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S50). In the non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, etc. are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

After step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, and the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether there is an input of a power failure warning signal, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, a non-winning random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is shown in FIG. 16, the starting opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A, 2108B, the first special symbol display device 1185, the second special symbol display device 1186, the upper special symbol memory display device. The drive signal output to 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S58, the main control program sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

[11. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 72 and 73.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a as shown in FIG. (Step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). The interrupt cycle is initialized by clearing this interrupt flag, and the next interrupt cycle is timed from its initial value.

Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 16 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the large winning openings. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball that entered the 2103, the detection signal from the first start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102 A detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has played a ball, a detection signal from a gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350, and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet. From the payout control board 4110 which informs that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, and input information as input information. Store in the storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2102. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 36 and corresponding thereto is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port switch 3022, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting port switch 2109. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2103. From the first starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2102 When the switch input processing is started, the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detect the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 are read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage of time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as having no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Due to the effect of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two readings, the first reading to the third reading comparing twice and the second reading to the fourth comparison reading twice. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first starting opening switch 3022, the second starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

Following step S74, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process which will be described later, usually described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are issued to the payout control board 4110. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the message has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, whereby the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 73, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Will count up.

For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value determining random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random numbers updating method, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number, the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 73 (main control Side main processing), the non-winning random number updating processing in step S50 and the winning random number updating processing in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are respectively updated, but this routine is executed each time an interrupt timer occurs. If the number of times the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 is performed is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time The big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50.

Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the main control program reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. 66 for paying out the game ball based on this input information, The self-check command shown in FIG. 66 for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. This main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main pay serial data.

Further, in the prize ball control processing, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103, for example. The detection information based on the detected signal is written in each corresponding definition bit area defined continuously by 1 bit for the number of the special winning opening 2103, and for example, 15 balls as a prize ball. A prize ball command is created as an award ball instruction indicating that the payout is to be made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

In the present embodiment, two special winning openings 2103 are provided as the special winning openings. Therefore, the main control program uses a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the definition bit areas described above. From each of them, the two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, they are referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in order. It should be noted that in the case of a game board having one special winning opening, one definition bit area is used. The definition bit areas used are 1 bit, for example, and are areas adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, for example, "1" is written in the first definition bit area, which is the fourth bit, as the detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted by writing, for example, "0", and prepares for acceptance of the next game ball.

Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area to check. For example, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 is the 4th bit, the main control program of the pachinko gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening as in the present embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires the information of the definition bit area of the 4th bit.

Further, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information acquired in this way according to the effective range of the prize ball of the special winning opening 2102, which will be described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that the prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a compulsory masking process on each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

In this prize ball control processing, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, Upon being written in the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above is created. Write in. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then causes the peripheral control board 4140 to transmit the winning sound command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, for example. Output the sound "Pokon".

On the other hand, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103 If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball. In this case also, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the above defined bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110, whereby the payout of gaming balls is allowed. To do.

At this time, the main control program, when the game balls are paid out in excess of the specified payout number that can be paid out in response to the receipt of the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, the excessive prize winning command (not shown in FIG. 36). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to make a predetermined notification.

By doing so, the illegal payout of the game balls is substantially prevented, so that damage to the game hall (game hall) can be suppressed to a minimum.

On the other hand, the main control program, instead, when the acceptance of the game ball to the special winning opening 2103 is detected, immediately writes the excessive prize winning command in the transmission information storage area, and controls the peripheral control MPU4150a. Alternatively, the speaker may be informed.

After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

As described above, when the game ball is received at the special winning opening 2103, it is possible to hear and confirm whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, this main control program causes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is a 1-byte (8-bit) command divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 37 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception processing described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to the effect is sent to the payout control board 4110, and output information is stored in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 36 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S82, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S84). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the special winning opening 2103 by the count switch 2110 when it is not in the big hit game state, the main control program is The abnormal prize state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit determination random number by +1 by a counter, and accepts the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. That is, triggered by the start winning (the satisfaction of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out as the big hit random number value for each start memory information that the start condition is satisfied, and this big hit random number value is built in the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value previously stored in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches this jackpot determination value (the predetermined winning condition is satisfied. ) In the case, the normal gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. This jackpot gaming state corresponds to a special gaming state, a first special gaming state, and a second special gaming state, which will be described later, and is a generic term for these gaming states.

In addition, the main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (see FIG. 103) described later, for example, the number of rounds, opening time, Definition data (table) representing the opening time and the winning ball count limit count of the game ball is a partial storage area of the main control built-in RAM specified by an address offset according to the number of big winning openings. Reading from a data area (not shown).

By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module configured by a set of program codes, is generally called by a CALL instruction included in the main routine and the program code group included in this program module is executed, and then the last. Is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction (see the first reference above). In this case, it is difficult to reduce the program capacity at first glance because the called-back instruction is required.

However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes consecutive subroutines, for example, instead of the main routine calling and executing the first subroutine with the CALL instruction and then continuously calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction. Alternatively, the return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing described above, the main control program determines whether or not the random number value for jackpot matches the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. This main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the result of the lottery, and the big hit random number value matches the certainty variation hit determination value (the certainty variation transition condition is satisfied). In the case, while shifting to the probability variation state, when the big hit random number value does not match this probability variation hit determination value (conditions have not been established since the probability variation), it shifts to a game state other than the probability variation ( Winning probability control means). Here, the "probability variation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Furthermore, in this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program is shown in FIG. 35 when the above-described lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. While creating various commands related to special figure 1 entrainment effect, when the lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102, various commands related to special figure 2 entrainment effect To create. The main control program stores the command thus created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

At the same time, the main control program determines the start pending display mode by referring to the preceding determination table (not shown) based on the various random number values acquired by the start winning, and the variable display after the start winning is displayed. Before disclosing the stopped symbol of the special symbol, a command used to execute a process (hereinafter, referred to as "preceding determination process") that implies the lottery result of the special lottery in advance (hereinafter, "holding ball number change as an example" Command)), and if the preceding determination process should be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program includes, in place of the random number value of the special lottery, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, as will be described later, in this reserved ball number change command. I am trying. The details of the preceding determination process will be described later.

Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to turn on the first special symbol display device 1185 according to the variable display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of special symbol, or the second special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light the container 1186, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Further, the main control program, for example, when shifting to the big hit game state, various commands classified as big hit related shown in FIG. 35 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing Display command, special winning opening 1 count display command, big hit ending command, and big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 is opened/closed to the attacker solenoid 2108A or attacker. The output of the drive signal to the solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control program, when the number of times (round) that the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the two-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on for two rounds. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 6, the 6-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 12 round display lamp is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the round is 16 times, the 16 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is set. The output of the lighting signal to the 16-round display lamp is set to be turned on and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 so as to light the presence or absence of the transition to the probability variation state in a predetermined color, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area.

By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, with the start winning of the game ball as a trigger, after that the special symbol starts changing display and the jackpot lottery is executed, and the predetermined winning condition is satisfied and the predetermined probability transition If the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability variation lamp as the game state indicator is changed and the state is changed to the probability variation state. In this probability variation state, the probability of the above-mentioned big hit lottery is set relatively higher than in the normal game state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big hit occurs (the above-mentioned first See references). In this way, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state ends, whether the jackpot game is looping mainly as the probability variation state continues until the next big hit. That behaves like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machine"), and the probability fluctuation state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes to a predetermined number after the jackpot game is over (hereinafter "ST (special time) machine ")) exists. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machines of the models that differ in the way the probability fluctuation state continues, the control of the above-mentioned gaming status indicators is different, and at the development stage the control of the gaming status indicators was designed for each model. It was necessary to improve the development efficiency.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, the main control program then determines whether or not the winning condition is met, and the winning condition is met. If it is, the normal game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, while if this winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that this winning condition will be satisfied is the normal game state. The state of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on while the state is changed to a probability variation state set relatively higher than the above. After that, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied again, the main control program sets the display mode of the game status display 1183 in a state where the probability fluctuation state is continued to a certain interrupt cycle. After the lighted state is once turned off, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on again from the turned-off state within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

More specifically, first, as described above, the main control program is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102, and then whether or not the winning condition is satisfied. (Lottery means), and if this winning condition is satisfied, while shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, if this winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, this The probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to a probability varying state in which the probability is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). This main control program makes the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 light up while the probability varying state continues, while displaying the gaming state indicator 1183 when shifting to a gaming state other than the probability varying state. The mode is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program sets the display mode of the game state display 1183 to a lighting state upon the transition to the above-mentioned probability variation state, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is once turned off from the lighting state within a certain specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is executed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (the lit state continuation control means). In this way, even though the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed for a very short time, It is possible for the player to appear as if the display mode of the game status display 1183 has not changed visually.

In this way, due to the display mode of the game status indicator 1183, it is difficult for the player's eyes to visually recognize that the lighting state has once been turned off, and it is visually recognized as if the lighting state continues. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability varying state continues continuously, the probability varying state continues until the special symbol has a prescribed number of variations after the jackpot gaming state ends. Along with the so-called ST (special time) machine, which shifts to the stochastic fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation count, a program code for controlling the display mode of the game status indicator 1183 between different models. Can be shared. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko game machines of different models.

Further, in this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program (game control means), while the winning condition is satisfied as described above, while shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, Further, when the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probability variation game state as an example of the specific game state is also shifted (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to a probability variation game state as an example of the specific game state without substantially paying out the game balls in the big hit game state. The specific game state may be a state in which a time-saving operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and a time-saving function is operating, or both the probability variation game state and the both at the same time. It may be in a gaming state. This main control program manages the remaining number of variable display times of special symbols during the period from a certain game state to another game state, and transmits game state information representing the managed game state. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, it is transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interrupt period (game state notifying means).

Specifically, this main control program, if the above-described probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, a special symbol is variably displayed until it shifts to the normal gaming state. Information about the remaining number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is included in any command that is transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern. By writing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, it is transmitted in command transmission processing S92 described later within the same timer interrupt period (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the above-described remaining number information in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing, the main control program reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and performs the gate winning process based on the input information. In the gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per-judgment random number when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and the main control built-in RAM as gate information. Stored in the gate information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, takes out the value of the random number per ordinary symbol for judgment from the read gate information, and carries out the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). The main control program determines whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the main control program makes the opening/closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are opened, and the game ball becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102, which is advantageous for the player. Shift to the state. Further, the main control program determines the variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination, based on the value of the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and is classified into the general symbol entraining effect related shown in FIG. Create various commands to be stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and output a lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 so as to light the normal symbol display device 1189 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol. Is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control program, when the value of the extracted random number per normal symbol for judgment is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. Various related commands are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output described above is output as output information. Store in the information storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value prestored in the main control built-in ROM, the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number Based on the normal pattern change display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the general figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. 35 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined ordinary The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information when the various commands from the payment control board 4110 are normally received. A starter solenoid that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that open and close the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when in the big hit game state, and that opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 2106. 2105 big hit information output signal, 6 round big hit information output signal, 12 round big hit information output signal, 16 round big hit information output signal, probability change information output signal, special symbol display Various information (game information) signals relating to games such as information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signals, etc. are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, this main control program reads out transmission information such as commands and data from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main circumference serial data (command Transmission means). In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine shown in FIG. 35 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Commands, various commands classified as jackpot-related (for example, a special winning opening count command corresponding to a special winning opening counting command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified into power-on, various commands classified into general figure synchronization effect related, various commands classified into ordinary electric figure effect related, various classified into notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command and frame status 2 command), test Various commands classified as related and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error generation command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as an error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means, second specific frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to the (unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose registers on a hardware basis and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process, and FIG. 77 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a continuation of power-on processing, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation processing, and FIG. 80 is a sprocket. It is a flow chart which shows an example of fixed position judging skip processing, Drawing 81 is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze judging processing, and Drawing 82 is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball scoring award ball stock number addition processing, FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, and FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of payout ball bending operation determination setting processing. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of ball-bending operation setting processing, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the error cancellation operation determination processing, and FIG. 91 is a signal processing (a) during the payout operation by ball lending, from the CR unit. 5 is a timing chart showing the input signal confirmation processing (a) of FIG.

First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gaze movement determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gaze movement setting processing, retry movement monitoring processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball gaze determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the pay-out-ball-hit action determination process, the retry action monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main action setting processes of step S562 in the pay-out control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball deviation determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, number of prize balls for prize balls Priorities are set in the order of addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for renting balls, stock monitoring processing, and pay-out-eye-ball movement determination setting processing.

[12-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the payout control unit power supply. Perform processing at the time of input. When the process at power-on of the payout control unit is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 4110a to set the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4110a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input/output setting (I/O input/output setting) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are set.

Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. A warning signal (payment blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time of power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitor circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 952 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed and the operation switch is determined. While it is determined that 952 is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 952 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. (The operation control means at power-on of the payout control side). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4110a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area It is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set is erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. To be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to permit access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) to be described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as the “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a. Then, this power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the CR communication information storage area is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. The term "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned off and the state in which the power is turned on, but also the state in which the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step In S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the payout control program causes all areas of the payout control internal RAM to be processed. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clearing process upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is sent as the power failure warning to the main control board. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of 4100. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input. To judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 66) are normally received, and the payout motor 839. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to, the prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 839, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 953 are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or a payout motor is issued. The drive signal is output to 839, or the number of balls from which the payout motor 839 has actually paid out the game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 839 is actually 10 Each time the individual game balls are paid out, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784.), and a display signal is output to the error LED display 953.

Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 952, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847, a detection signal from the counting switch 838, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, A main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball-blown state due to a payout rotating body to which rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is determined, the ball-blur determination is set as the determination condition. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. When the determination is made as to whether or not the game ball stored in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full, the full tank determination set as the determination condition It is set as a determination condition when it is determined whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number according to the detection signal from the time-out switch 821. In addition to performing time management such as the ball run-out determination time, due to the discrepancy between the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838. Inconsistency counter reset determination that is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not paying out game balls that are not consistently being repeated Time management of time. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-judging determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball-blurring judgment time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the out-of-ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Every time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball outage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit 6 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the processing of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set).

By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. As a result, when the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 4110a, in the CR communication process, exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, a momentary power failure or a power failure and CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of game balls cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4110a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. You can do it.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4110a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or stop at the time of power restoration, even if the power is stopped or stopped momentarily. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4110a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4110a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 4110a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1, and the payout ball deviation motion determination setting process is performed. In the setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not made, the logical state of the PRDY signal (LOW) indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible Is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, when the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power restoration, so it is extremely possible after the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and the CR unit 6 can be output. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, a CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, a pachinko game. When the machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected to each other through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, to pay out the ball In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6, and when the logic is LOW, In other words, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected to each other via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to inform that the payout operation for paying out is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 4110. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 described above is stored based on the input information by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 described above by the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 becomes a predetermined number or more. Or not. For example, to determine whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the game balls stored, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to determine whether the tank is full or the full ball switch is performed in this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is from ON to OFF. When the state transitions to, the clocking of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. To determine. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the gaming ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is stored as the status information storage described above. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the game space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area.

The determination of whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also made by using the timer interruption period of 2 ms in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF due to the previous full (2 ms before) and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 is turned ON from OFF. When the state transitions to, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer updating process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 is ON, the out-of-ball information indicating that the number of balls in the game ball taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is in the state. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 821 is OFF, it is considered that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the out-of-ball notification is given. Information is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 66) are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands are not normally received, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal, and ball scooping are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 953 of the payout control board 4110 is created, and the display data is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-described ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this ball-out information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more, corresponding display data (In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (the number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main frame) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 37 based on this various information. Main control board by creating open command, main frame closing command, frame status 1 command (corresponding to first error occurrence command), error cancel navigation command (corresponding to first error cancel command) and frame status 2 command 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball, information relating to the location where the error occurred regarding this payout operation (hereinafter A frame state 1 command (first error cancellation command) including "error occurrence position information" is generated (error occurrence command generating means). On the other hand, in the command transmission process, if the payout control program has the value 1 of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG, that is, if the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 is detected, the above-mentioned error occurs. A cancel navigation command (first error cancel command) is output (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) when the main frame opening detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input (main frame command sending means, 1 body frame command transmitting means, first specific frame command transmitting means). On the other hand, when the main frame closing detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input, this payout control program transmits a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) (main frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). When the door frame opening detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame command sending means, first door frame opening command). 1 door frame command transmitting means, first specific frame command transmitting means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command transmitting means, first specific frame command transmitting means). Further, this payout control program reads the error information including the error content from the above-mentioned status information storage area in the above-mentioned command transmission processing (step S566), and the machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko gaming machines. And an error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the hall computer receives the error information signal, the hall computer provides the unit number information and the error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk plays the pachinko game with the unit number based on the unit number information. The machine can recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL subsequent to the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

After step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and checks in step S540 whether or not the power outage notice signal (payout power outage notice signal) is input. If there is no input of this power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If it is, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , Step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, step S554 performs CR communication processing, step S556 performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing, and step S558 performs command reception processing. Command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value is stored in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4110a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4110a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when a power failure advance notice signal (payout power failure advance notice signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program sets clearing of the watchdog timer (step S60). The clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage areas for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the sum is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4110a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "processing at power-off of payout control unit".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4110a) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed by the subsequent power recovery.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[12-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 78 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Registers are switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[12-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 79 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program causes the detection slit for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted to the light of the rotation angle switch 847. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is used as the most significant bits B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S618). . In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. The most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Shift 1 bit at a time.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

As described above, every time the rotation angle switch history creation processing is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The value 1 or the least significant bit B0 is set in the least significant bit B0 depending on the state where the optical axis of the angle switch 847 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, or the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 can be created.

[12-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination as to whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 can be surely started in the state where no ball is generated.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. 80, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipped), the payout rotation is 1. The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

In step S630, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program causes the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the pay-out built-in ROM, and is "000011111B ("B" represents a bit."" in the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have the value 0 and the lower 4. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above-mentioned detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. Means that the state has been changed from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 839 shown in FIG. 17 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 839 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the backlash causes the payout rotating body to rotate. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of the payout motor 839 in about two steps, in the present embodiment, when performing the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, the rotation angle switch 847 is used. History of detection signals, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 79, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, This is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 generated by the latest generation of four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 839 is rotated by four steps, so that the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash is more than that of the payout rotor, and the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash is absorbed. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 839. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (=2 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU 4110a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the concave portions of the payout rotating body, and is formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 839 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection disk (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 839 in 18 steps.

The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 839 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Specifically, (1) the transition state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 to transit from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit rotates angle. A state in which the optical axis of the switch 847 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”), and (3) the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. The state is managed in three states, that is, a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 839, the fixed position confirmation state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 839, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 839 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 rotations.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 transits from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (=2 ms×13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4110a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction is 0, sets the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG to the initial value 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 3 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program directly ends this routine. .. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. The rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 847, and the detection signal from this rotation angle switch 847 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the prize ball case inside board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls. Cheap.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described (3) fixed position determination skip state, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The cycle and the period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[12-5. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. In the ball-blurring determination processing, it is determined whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted.

When the ball head determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM to rotate from the rotation angle as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is If the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball is not in a ball-blown state, this routine is finished as it is. To do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the sphere is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 839 is performing an overturning operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program sets the ball entrainment determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. By validating the ball gaze determination time, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. ..

[12-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, the process for adding the various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later, and the process of adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is performed according to the award ball stock number addition process. After the game balls have been paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set to perform the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[12-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the power-on process of payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether the command is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes to this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control internal RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that the prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[12-6-2. Addition process for the number of prize balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition process for renting a ball will be described. When the award ball stock number addition process for renting balls is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when there is a ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program determines the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control RAM. The award ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the award ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the award balls are prioritized (the award balls and the ball rental are separately managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[12-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether the player is continuing the game during the game in a state where the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and ends this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned number of prize balls stock) has exceeded the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or higher, and to a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or higher.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676) and ends this routine.

When the game state becomes a big hit, and the player is relaxed and pays attention to the performance unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the plate side liquid crystal display device 246 shown in FIG. 19, the player is careless. During one round, the game ball paid out as the prize ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls are collected in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, which is provided on the door frame 5 as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. As a result, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player can fill the lower plate 302 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the player should pay attention to the game as early as possible.

[12-8. Disposal ball scooping motion judgment setting processing]
Next, the payout ball tilting motion determination setting process will be described. This payout ball gaze motion determination setting processing is performed by a payout motor 839 to pay out the game ball to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7, perform a ball gaze motion, or such a payout. It is a process to set whether to discharge or not to discharge.

When the pay-out-ball tilt motion determination setting process is started, in the pay-out control unit 4110 of the pay-out control board 4110, the pay-out control program is under the control of the pay-out control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, the payout control program, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry operation). The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormal, the payout control program determines whether or not the in-ball flag PBE-FLG has the value 1. It is determined whether or not (step S686). The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is generated, and the payout motor 839 causes the bulging of the ball. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball glancing motion is not performed.

In step S686, when the in-bulb flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when the inclining movement is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information in the payout control RAM described above. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 839.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed on the basis of the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout controller (main processing of the payout controller) illustrated in FIG. 77. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area, and it is determined whether the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls stored.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 839 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. Will increase.

On the other hand, in step S690, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (the value is 0), that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game balls are not paid out.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the flag PBE-FLG is in the state of the ball tilting, that is, when the ball tilting motion is performed, the payout control program performs a ball tilting motion setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In the ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally performed, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible (CR unit 6). When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. Then, it is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. . Note that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

[12-8-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 839 is driven to set the game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, outputs the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. It is read (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (stop). ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and is stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). This real ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 839. This count will be described later in detail, but in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control main process) shown in FIG. 77, the count from the counting switch 838 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual sphere count PB is read from the prize sphere information storage area.

Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV in step S722.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when the payout motor 839 has the number of game balls to be paid out, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds the value 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is incremented.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program directly ends this routine. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination in step S728, that is, the actual execution. If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Accordingly, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, in other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is not yet paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the unpaid game ball.

[12-8-2. Ball-gaze operation setting process]
Next, the ball bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

When the ball gaze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed on the basis of the ball-bending determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

When the ball deflection determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). ..

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.”)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program is The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 is set so as to perform the ball bending motion (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S760), and ends this routine. The in-ball bleeding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the out-of-ball state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 839 is performing an overturning operation. When no motion is performed (end of the ball-bending motion), the value is set to 0.

On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4110a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. . Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held), that logic HI is maintained.

Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[12-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. 88, the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 847 (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is "000011111B ("B" represents a bit.")" in the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC, the number of balls of the game sphere which is received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838, Is a counter for calculating the difference, and normally, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 match. , The value becomes 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 86. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of balls of the game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the actual count switch The number of balls detected in 838 and the payout of game balls that do not match each other due to a mismatch with each other are determined by monitoring with an inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from this input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778). .

Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsuccessful gaming ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about one in several millions. In the present embodiment, the mismatch threshold value is obtained. The value 5 is set as INCTH.

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM at power recovery. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue the monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of the power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the prize ball. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays the "retry error". In order to inform that it is, the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set by setting retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 953 which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that the prize ball is being stocked, the payout control program sets the prize ball stocking information in which the number “9” is displayed on the error LED display 953, and the above-mentioned payout control is incorporated. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when this external factor occurs. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 as a RAM clear signal. Under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, the main control program described above erases all of the various information stored in the main control internal RAM, and issues a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 4140. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (when the retry operation is abnormal). When operating normally), the value is set to 0.

The payout control program shows retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. In the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit), a retry error status command is created in the command sending process of step S566 and sent to the main control board 4100, and LED display data is created in step S564 in the same process. In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output processing of step S548 in the same processing is performed. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 953, and the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 953. In the main control board 4100 which has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 causes the door frame side lighting blink command to output a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in (4) to cause the plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED indicator 953 mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Accordingly, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk in the hall checks the malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, and contact failure of various connectors. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 953 are not notified, the operation can be performed extremely quickly.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and is described above. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, the value of the above-described inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since a plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like will come to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838 can be suppressed extremely small.

Further, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC determines that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. It has been initialized when the internal factor that it became As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as operating the operation switch 952 to cancel the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4110a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. Absent.

[12-10. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset processing, the number of balls of the game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. Is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between the.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 4110a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the time has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of game balls that are paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 is usually one. As a result, the value becomes 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Therefore, by this retry operation, the ball of the game ball received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out. The number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838 and the disparity of the game balls due to the disagreement with each other are paid out, and the inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the payout is repeated. With the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied gaming ball due to a retry operation will be paid out is about several millions.

Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the gaming board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the gaming board 5 is mounted. By exchanging the gaming board 5 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specification can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. In the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, as described above, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, thereby determining whether or not the retry operation is repeated. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the power-on process of the payout control unit shown at 76 (setting at power recovery of the RAM work area), the stored inconsistency counter INCC is restarted at power-on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the gaming board 5 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is replaced with a gaming board 5'having a different game specification from the gaming board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 on the board 4110 starts the process again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 5 ′ mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 5 before the replacement is inherited as it is. Therefore, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 5'is mounted, and by chance, there is a probability of one millionth of a number, and the number of unmatched gaming balls occurs, resulting in an inconsistency counter INCC. When the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU4110a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5′. May occur. That is, in a period shortly after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5′, a malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Although the error does not occur, the retry operation may be suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation.

In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 5′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 5′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is one in the millions of times when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. , The probability that one unsatisfied game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as the probability that one ball is paid out, and therefore the probability of several millions of times from the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 88. With, the value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 4 by 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which corresponds to the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program executes the control of the payout control MPU 4110a in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838, which causes a malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. It is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that there is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88. Retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 953 is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4110a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information that conveys the message from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

It is noted that by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the retry operation and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed and the counting switch 838 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time, the above-mentioned operation is performed. As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk in the hall or the like changes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. You will have to rush to confirm. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, when the counting switch 838 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is reset every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who conducts the cheating during this period is, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC up to the mismatch threshold INCTH, and the counting switch 838 is intentionally set. The number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who commits an illegal act can be extremely reduced even when the game machine is repeatedly deactivated for a long time.

[12-11. Error release operation determination processing]
Next, the error cancellation operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 17 is operated.

When the error canceling operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program causes the operation switch 952 to cancel the error as shown in FIG. 90 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area, and does not instruct the error cancellation when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. It is determined that the operation switch 952 has not been operated, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, the operation switch 952 is operated by determining that the instruction is to cancel the error. It is determined that

When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs the error flag state confirmation processing. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normally operating). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the state information corresponding to the error flag is set to The RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 77, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state is read. A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the fact that an error has occurred in the retry operation is notified. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

In the main control board 4100 which has received the retry error information, the main control program transmits the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub-control program performs retry operation error notification processing for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." and "Please check the harness of the payout control board." (2 times) Repeatedly notifies the clerk of the hall or the like by flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is like this. Upon hearing the error notification announcement of the retry operation, the hall clerk, etc., malfunctions the counting switch 838 shown in FIG. 17, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Can be confirmed much earlier than in the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light of a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs a cancellation setting process (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 953, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept at HI, that is, the state in which it is raised is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, it is already displayed by the error LED indicator 953. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for informing that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above is "normal". The information to which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed is forcibly overwritten. Also, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is possible, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4110a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal board 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine ends. In this error flag initialization processing, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operated is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing game balls and the like. .

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicates the internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the operation switch 952 is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process, the external factor is triggered. When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated as a trigger, that is, the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM to clear the error. Similar to the case where the switch 952 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the operation switch 952 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred with respect to the payout operation, by the main processing on the main control side when the power is turned on. Instead, for a predetermined time until the operation is performed, an operation for demonstrating a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) It functions as a department. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball, after the lapse of the predetermined time. Here, even if the hall clerk is a person who is not accustomed to operating the pachinko gaming machine, as long as he or she remembers the position of the operating switch 952 on the rear surface of the gaming machine, depending on the timing of operating the operating switch 952, If a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, while exhibiting the function of canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball, depending on the timing of operating the operation switch 952, it will be The function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted within the predetermined time. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of dealing with the error and appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The player can resume the game before the player loses the motivation for the game.

[12-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls for 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and for the amount of money, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out twice) is used as the number of lent balls. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[12-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the ball. When it is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 91(d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110, and as PRDY, a game ball lending device connection terminal Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on (turned on). The operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display plate 365 as the TDS shown in FIG. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4110a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a as a BRDY signal.

In the payout control MPU 4110a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program, as shown in FIG. 91(b), changes from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms). By the time the set amount of time elapses, a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc. in one payout operation. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money.) Whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

Since the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen among the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, FIG. 91(b) ), the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls etc. by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 91(c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4110a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, It is set to 20 ms±1 ms.) in order to notify that the single payout operation is started, that is, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the startup state is maintained and the payout control MPU4110a is held. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 91(b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H3. , BRQ which is started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 91(c), the payout control MPU 4110a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). Then, a predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a with its logic being set to LOW, that is, held in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the game balls as the number of lent balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 out of the number of the game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money. ), the next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from timing H5, BRQ, from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

When the payout control MPU 4110a similarly pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. 91(c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4110a while keeping the logic LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is connected to a lending device connection terminal such as a game ball as EXS. Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 91(a) until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H7. The BRDY that has been raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. 77. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

Note that the payout control MPU 4110a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is caught, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). Is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, as shown in FIG. 91(d), the PRDY signal that was started and held from timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state of falling. It holds and outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4110a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 through the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it is held rising), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is performed. It is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 4110a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) when the logic HI is maintained.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4110a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the lent number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. In addition, a setting staff (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to lend, and the upper plate 301 or When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4110a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount of money, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money as the number of lent balls. When the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 are set to be paid out, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[12-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other rental device connection terminal board 869 even after the above-described loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY, and the CR unit 6 connects the game ball or the like to the lending device, even if the signal is not output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not activated or the lending instruction monitoring time HC described above has elapsed. Even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869 and the signal is not dropped, or even if the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has passed, the CR unit 6 sends the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the game. Through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the CR unit 6 outputs the signal to the payout control board 4110 and does not raise the signal, or even when the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above elapses. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and when the signal is not dropped, the PRDY and EXS described above are used to set the BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91(e) and (f), the payout control MPU 4110a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and then a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms±1 ms)), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a. Output from the output terminal of, and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held and lowered from the timing J1 to HI, after a lapse of a predetermined period JB (200 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, the state is kept up and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4110a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J2 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (100 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J3 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JD (100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a while being kept in the activated state, and is output to the CR unit 6 as PRDY via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing balls etc. (timing J4 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J4 to LOW after a predetermined period JE (100 ms±1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a while being held in the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5. ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J5 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms±1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls and the like (timing J6). ).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[13. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 94 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control board 4140 is composed of a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. The order is set to V blank interrupt processing.

[13-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[13-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs peripheral control unit power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb thereof. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents When the two match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), is copied back to perform a hot start, while the compared content does not match (that is, , 0), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, for cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is also compared with the effect backup information (SRAM) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 20). ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 20) to clear it to zero. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 19) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

Further, in this peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjusting function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when the power supply unit starts supplying power (initial contact sensitivity adjusting means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as an electrostatic capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a as an initial value of a predetermined contact determination threshold value (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact point” when the power supply unit starts supplying power). (Also referred to as a “determination threshold”).

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and the time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set as the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set, is included.

In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is used. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 20 is used to perform serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I/O port is started, the game board 5 is placed in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later. Has become.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the data is stored in the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is used). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 is created in the 4150cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). When the bus is not used, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai and is written, so that the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written to this. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation (rotation direction of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation section 405, etc.) are set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Whether or not the portion 405 is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotational direction of the dial operation portion 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation portion 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the display data creation process described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 21 by the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. In the display data output processing, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 246 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and Speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization between the effect provided by the music provided by the speaker provided on the door frame 5 and the effect sound or the like in accordance with various effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the music accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 can be stereo-played with music, sound effects, and the like in addition to the notification sound and the notification sound. It will be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the beginning to the emission data of various LEDs. The pointer is updated in order to instruct whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the head among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later is generated. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own process is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so that the drive data that should be originally instructed is instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the production control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means). That is, the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols reserved (0-4 ) Normal symbol memory command for identifying, a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start pending changes, a game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2103 Each time the special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence command) showing the contents of full tank shown in FIG. 36. Is analyzed (command analysis means) to recognize which game state is currently in effect. In addition, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is the main frame opening command, main frame closing command, door frame opening command or door frame Analyze whether it is a close command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands are shown in FIG. 35, which are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands which are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related, various commands which are classified into jackpot-related, and power-on. Various commands, various commands related to general figure synchronization effect, various commands related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands classified to notification display shown in FIG. 36, door frame opening command described above , Door frame close command, main frame open command and main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error cancel command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command), etc. There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 4150 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands to be performed, such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, a game A panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 (production device), a plate liquid crystal display device 470 (production device), a lamp (production device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (production device) is used. An audible warning is given to the outside (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player operates the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 to enter an error canceling navigation command into the main control board 4100 despite the game state, Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program stores in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program, in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the time-sequential light emission data forming the schedule data for light emission mode generation is arranged. Based on the light emission data, the peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is performed. The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 5, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 4150ce, and is set in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in chronological order in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is the data forming the screen generation schedule data. The screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and from the extracted at least one character data. Sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, an attempt is made to make it difficult for the player's interest to be exhausted by displaying a video in which a number of material images are superimposed on the background image in each frame according to the progress of the game ( Although it is required to perform display control so that a larger number of material images are included in each frame in order to display more versatile images, a large number of material images are displayed in each frame. At first glance, inclusion seems to impose a heavy burden on display control.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of the frame including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program causes each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame to be displayed. While managing correspondence relationship information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are defined in advance, when the predetermined frame of each frame is to be displayed, the correspondence relationship information is referred to and the predetermined relationship is determined. At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and the drawing data is included in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a without including the other material image except the predetermined material image. It is generated and stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means). The details will be described below.

First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) out of a large number of background image data used to display a large number of background images forming each frame is At least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) on the background image based on the specific background image data is originally arranged at a position (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), As shown in a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter, referred to as “concealed state”), the following management is performed.

First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control ROM 4150b stores the following correspondence association table (correspondence information management means), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are associated with this correspondence association. Browse the table. In this correspondence association table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) are displayed. Predefined correspondence information is managed for the correspondence together with a confidentiality cancellation command (confidence cancellation command) for canceling the visual confidentiality state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence association table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified using the sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame are used as part of the correspondence information. The value is managed.

In the correspondence association table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be displayed in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, Correspondence with a confidentiality cancellation command for canceling the visual confidentiality state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from the sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). The production control program, when trying to display a predetermined frame in accordance with the result of the predetermined production lottery executed upon the establishment of the start condition, is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a so that the correspondence relation of the correspondence relation table is obtained. By referring to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and expressed is specified (material image specifying means).

Furthermore, the production control program specifies the descrambling command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table when the desired sprite should be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, The specified security release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (security release instruction means). This concealment cancellation command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as a “desired sprite number”) that can identify a desired sprite whose confidential state should be released in the predetermined frame. With the output of such a confidentiality cancellation command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated from the initial state which was off to the on state. This name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be displayed in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes the drawing process.

Here, when the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is operated as follows. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has not received the confidentiality cancellation command, it displays a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame in the confidential state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. The drawing data for this is generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the production control program can display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

On the other hand, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source receives the above-mentioned concealment canceling command, the VDP 4160a confirms that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included therein is updated to ON. As a trigger, the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship linking table is referred to, and the desired sprite corresponding to the confidentiality cancellation command is specified. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data in the frame buffer for canceling the hidden state of the specified desired sprite and for making the display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

In this way, the effect control program does not need to manage the sprite group that can be displayed in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene, due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, by controlling whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the concealment cancellation command, which is much simpler than the conventional display control, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is made to draw a frame representing each desired sprite or desired. It is possible to draw a frame that does not represent the sprite of. As a result, it is possible to simplify the display control of the frame including many sprites and reduce the processing load.

Moreover, since the correspondence relation linking table described above is used to manage the correspondence relation by linking the sprite group including the desired sprite with the production control program (the concealment cancellation command group issued by the). , The creation work of the sprite data and the design work of the production control program can be made independent and completely separated, and the design work related to the display control can be simplified.

By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process at power-on, and then the sensitivity device is operated at the sensitivity (the first reference document described above). reference). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance, depending on the game environment thereafter.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation process, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a so that the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 (second display unit). A function for outputting the above-mentioned production command (production execution command) for executing a display operation in a mode of urging contact with the operation surface, while allowing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246. And a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) (command output means) That is, the production control program, as a production command (production execution command), causes the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger (to the operation surface of the contact type input means). The command for executing the display operation of (contact mode) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact reminder command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the effect control program (the display control program under the control of) produces a finger on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is caused to display a screen in a mode of prompting for touch.

Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, mainly, the production control program detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detection unit) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. This effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, and specifies the position represented by this coordinate value as the detection point (detection point acquisition means). Operation information including this initial position is acquired. The effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range).

In this touch panel processing, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concern, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the effect command (effect execution command) described above, and then in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold value is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) shown in FIG. Yes (sensitivity adjustment command means).

Specifically, the effect control program, as the above-mentioned predetermined timing, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses from the main control MPU 4100a, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 35). ) Is received as a trigger for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), or when the variation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (Fig. When a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the message (see 35), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example outside the touch panel module 246a, the touch panel 246 touches. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. That is, this effect control program is triggered by the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a receiving a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and based on this threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold for use. Specifically, when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses the capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold.

Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detection capacitance acquired each time the contact state is detected as described above, and When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold value, it is determined that the contact surface is in the non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold value, Judge that the contact surface is in contact.

Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

With the above configuration, the touch panel controller 481 changes the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by the reception of the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined contact determination threshold value is updated, if the output timing of the threshold value setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) is adjusted at a desired timing. It becomes (calibration). Therefore, the production control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold value setting command by removing the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the touch panel 246 is always operated without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

As the timing when this effect control program should output the threshold value setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as described above, for example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end that is output when the variable display of the special symbol ends It is possible that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the command or the special figure 2 entrainment end command was received and the player has stopped playing the game, and thus touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246. Low timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the variation display of the special symbol that may perform the effect using the touch panel 246, and is performed along with the end of the variation display. There is.

Further, as the timing for outputting the threshold setting command, in addition to this, the production control program receives from the main control MPU 4100a a general-figure-tuned production end-time command (see FIG. 35) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time elapses. It may be a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start.

On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of the electrostatic capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 which can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity, but is required even after the power is turned on. Since sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing in response to it, it is erroneously detected as a change in capacitance even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and not by the operation of the player. Hard to do.

Following step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command data. Incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in 1 above, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, the audio data is audio data that is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, and the volume from the muting to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from the mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk or the like in the hall rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 will not be displayed. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect that flows from the speaker provided is reduced, it is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is cheating (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume is high). The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating by the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 be more powerful, in addition to the music and the sound effect, by increasing the volume of sound flowing. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20 in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is provided in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3(1fr) and Bank4(1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0(1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1(1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0(1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0(1fr). The stored contents are all copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) should be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1fr) should be changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are continuously copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the top address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of) to the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1fr). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous by Bank4( in the second area 4150cc). 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 20, that is, for each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) should be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 4150dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to specify that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously contiguous by Bank4 (in the second area 4150dc). All are sequentially copied from the start address of the SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[13-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 19, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed in response to this will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be executed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is notified that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1, and the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. In step S1038 of the closing process (peripheral control unit steady process), the value 0 is set to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined next time by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of which the processing has been omitted is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is not processed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[13-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 92 will be described. .. When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and as shown in FIG. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32nd 1ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the effect control program is the same as this routine. To finish. When the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program sets the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 according to the drive data designated by the pointer. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to perform serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port. When serial transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is set. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is generated by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the start address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered by the fact that the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai transfers the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and writes the data to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 20 is used to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I/O port. When the serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I/O port is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is configured. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, based on the drive data designated by the pointer, the drive to the motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is performed. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and is created, and the peripheral shown in FIG. It is set in the transmission data storage area 4150cag on the motor drive board side of the control RAM 4150c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is registered). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the dial operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence/absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), and subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) that is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as the effect backup information (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150 cb, Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), peripheral control. The DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. The request factor of 4150ac specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are copied to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and then Bank0 (1 ms). ) From the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second backup area 4150cc From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1ms). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 4150cc. 1 ms) is copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the production progress state.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 starts the transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is within a period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value 1 is set, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period during which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise and changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. 20 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data, the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU4150a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[13-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing will be described. The peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is executed when a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time when the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. ..

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The received command is stored in the ring buffer.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0(1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2(1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and are stored in Bank0(1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously written from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all are sequentially copied from the top address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specifying a copy to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The contents up to this point are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 4150aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the request command area of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. By designating copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are predetermined. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied sequentially from the head address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 4150a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power cut advance notice signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, "0" is written to the storage area of the built-in VRAM as an example for initialization, and the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 92 is restarted from the beginning. The Rukoto.

As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU4150a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so the clear signal is sent to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. The output is designed to be interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled in the endless loop in the determination in S1312 and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The main control board 4100 has a first starting opening 2101 or a first starting opening 2101 which is a starting area in which a game ball shot by a hitting ball launching device 650 is directed toward a game area 1100 defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 4100a is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game when it is accepted by the second starting port 2102. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout of gaming balls by the prize ball device 740 based on the prize command shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) which is a payout command from the main control board 4100. The payout control MPU4110a is mounted as

The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about games even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 4110a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 952 of FIG. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a period from the power-on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main-control-side power-on process of FIG. 72 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. In order to output the RAM clear signal of FIG. 24 to the main control MPU4100a which is a game control microprocessor, and from within the period when the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 75 is performed after the power is turned on. Then, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU4110a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and turning on the power. From time to time, the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 72 is performed (or from the power-on time, the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 75 is performed). When it is operated after the elapse, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 is output to the main control MPU 4100a which is the game control microprocessor as an error release signal for releasing the error that has occurred with respect to the prize ball device 740, and the payout control microprocessor It also has an error canceling function of outputting to the payout control MPU 4110a.

In this way, when the operation switch 952 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 72 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 24 for erasing the information regarding is output to the main control MPU4100a which is the game control microprocessor, and the determination processing of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. When operated within a predetermined period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for deleting the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and period during which the determination process of step S16 in the power-on process of the main control side of FIG. 72 is performed from the time of power-on (or the determination process of step S512 in the power-on process of the payout control unit of FIG. 75 from the time of power-on) Is operated after a lapse of time), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 is not output to the main control MPU 4100a which is the game control microprocessor as an error cancellation signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the prize ball device 740. Since it also has an error canceling function for outputting to the payout controlling microprocessor, which is a payout controlling MPU 4110a, two different functions of a RAM clear function and an error canceling function are respectively operated by one operation switch 952. It can be provided in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, the RAM clearing function and the error clearing function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[14. Control processing on main control board]
97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first and second starting opening winning a prize process shown in FIG. 98. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.

102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination processing, which is one processing of the jackpot game preparation processing shown in FIG. FIG. 104 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game mode determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. The main control program executes a timer interrupt process every 4 ms, for example.

[Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the main control program first executes the first and second starting mouth winning processing (step S6110). In the first/second starting opening winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 3022 and is accepted in the first starting opening 2101, or The game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 2109, and it is determined whether the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102.

Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and when the processing flag is 0, executes the fluctuation start processing (step S6130). The processing flag of 0 indicates that the start condition is satisfied for the start memory information already stored in the start memory information storage area described above. In this variation start process, the main control program performs settings such as to start the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning the jackpot, Then, this processing flag is updated to 1.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this processing flag is 1, the main control program executes the variation pattern setting processing (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, the main control program, each time the start condition is satisfied, the first special symbol display 1185 is used to variably display the first special symbol (special 1 symbol) The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means), or the second special symbol display 1186 is used to variably display the second special symbol (special 2 symbol). The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means), and then the processing flag is updated to 2. In addition, this variation pattern represents the variation time from the start of variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186. ing.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). When the processing flag is 2, the following changing processing is executed (step S6180). In this changing process, the main control program monitors the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S6150) with a timer, and when it times out, the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second The variable display of the special symbol using the special symbol display device 1186 is stopped.

After that, when the main control program determines that the jackpot game win condition is satisfied in the jackpot lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines that the win condition of the small hit game is satisfied in the big hit lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130) and the win is achieved, the process flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions has been established in the jackpot lottery and the player has not won, the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, the main control program executes again from the fluctuation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). If the processing flag is 3, the main control program executes the jackpot game preparation process (step S6200). In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program activates the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and performs a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game thus determined. (For example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the processing flag is 4, the following jackpot game processing is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game process, the main control program, based on the number of rounds as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607), the number of open times, the open time, and the number of winning restrictions on game balls The opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106A or the other opening/closing member 2106B is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and in the first special game, the opening/closing operation of one opening/closing member 2106A. While executing the opening/closing operation of the other opening/closing member 2106B, the opening/closing operation of the other opening/closing member 2106B is executed and the opening/closing operation of the other opening/closing member 2106A is restricted in the second special game.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following small winning combination establishment processing is executed (S6240). In this small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening/closing operation of the one opening/closing member 2106A or the other opening/closing member 2106B as the game mode of the small hitting. After that, the main control program opens one opening/closing member 2106A or the other opening/closing member 2106B once for a very short time, for example, as a small hit game mode, based on the set number of times of opening and opening time. It is controlled so that it will be in the closed state later, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S6130) is performed again. This small hit game is not a game involving the operation of a condition device like a big hit game, but is a kind of big hit game, for example, one opening/closing member 2106A or the other opening/closing member 2106B is opened for a very short time. It is a game of a form very similar to the game (so-called short open jackpot game).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hit establishment time process S6240 depending on whether or not the process flag is 5 in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process shown in FIG. You can choose either. That is, the main control program, if the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 5, it is possible to have a gaming property including the small hit game, while if the processing flag is in the range of 0 to 4, the small hit game is not included. It can be playable. In this way, the special symbol and the special electric auditors product control process include the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the process flag as in the small hit establishment process S6240. It is considered not to be unused program code. That is, the main control program will execute another branch process provided in parallel instead of executing the small hitting establishment process S6240. With such a program configuration, it is possible to share the program code between models having different playability whether or not to include a small hit game, for example, different models depending on whether or not to include a small hit game. There is no need to develop each program code in the interim.

As described above, the main control program selectively executes any one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the above-described process flag, and thereafter. , This special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing ends.

[1st and 2nd starting mouth prize processing]
FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first/second starting mouth winning process (step S6110) is a process for determining whether or not a game ball has been accepted in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and that there has been such acceptance. On condition that is determined, it includes a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

[Entering a game ball into the second starting opening]
First, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening switch 2109 (step S6201), and when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening switch 2109, the second starting opening is determined. It is determined that the game ball has been accepted in 2102 (hereinafter, also referred to as “start prize”) (start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In this step S6202, the main control program acquires various random number values for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) triggered by this start winning.

It should be noted that this main control program, in combination with the jackpot determination random number, etc., triggered by the start prize, instead of obtaining the jackpot game mode determination random value (for example, the number of rounds determination random value), that is, the jackpot 2103. Before determining the release mode, the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol are first determined, and the game is advanced. Although details will be described later, this main control program detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. Taking this as a trigger, a jackpot game mode determination random value is acquired.

At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process described later.

First, in the second start pending storage process, the main control program, the start storage information acquired when the game ball is received in the second start opening 2102 (big hit determination random number value, big hit symbol random number value, etc.) ) Is stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second starting storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM while associating with each other, the type of special symbol and the order of reservation (step S6203). That is, the main control program, regarding the second special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not satisfied yet, although the start condition is satisfied, the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol type. A predetermined number is stored in the second starting storage information storage area (starting storage information storage means, second starting storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in a manner that the specified order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program, when the game ball is newly received in the second starting port 2102, that is, when the starting conditions are satisfied (at the time of starting winning), any second starting memory information is the second starting memory information. If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening winning command, which indicates that the game ball has been received in the second start opening 2102, in the transmission information storage area and sets the start opening in the command transmission processing described above. The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned second starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of second starting memory information of the second special symbol has increased). As a result, it is determined whether or not the following predecessor determination conditions are satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means). As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-described jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read, and the read random number value matches the pre-reading determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, "Prior judgment lottery").

The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol look-ahead determination value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol. When it does not match the prefetching determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the preceding judgment command transmission processing described later when this preceding judgment condition is not satisfied, while the following preceding judgment command transmission processing is executed when this preceding judgment condition is satisfied. To execute.

In the command transmission process for the preceding determination, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the second special symbol, and sets it. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmitting means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in this special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command.

Specifically, this special symbol 2 storage prefetching command, for example, special symbol 2 type prefetch command, special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command, special symbol 2 variation type prefetch command, and special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command , Or any one of them or a combination of any one of them, and includes prefetch information described later. The prefetch information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number information, and the variation distribution table information.

This special symbol 2 type look-ahead command includes information about the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a loss. It is information indicating which of the two. This special symbol 2 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command includes the variation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, to make a preceding determination described later. The production can be executed.

In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability varying state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition time point. (Hereinafter referred to as “judgment suppression range”), the notification that the preceding judgment condition is satisfied is suppressed (advance judgment suppression means). That is, the main control program, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the game state is thus changed from the probability variation state to the normal game state. Writing of (preceding determination instruction command) is restricted. Thereby, in the command transmission process (see FIG. 74) described above, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is suppressed from being transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this hold history update process, the main control program, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the first or second start storage information storage area, In a mode in which the at least one first or second starting memory information can be specified until it is established, a reserved display mode (for example, lighting, on the upper special symbol storage display 1184 or the lower special symbol storage display 1187) (Blinking or extinguishing), and then a start condition corresponding to the priority start memory information among the at least one first or second start memory information stored by the first or second start memory information storage means. When the above condition is established, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start memory information to be prioritized is stopped, and the start memory information to be prioritized is deleted from the first or second start memory information storage area (hold). Digestion control means).

[Entering a game ball into the first starting opening]
On the other hand, when the detection signal is not output from the second starting opening switch 2109 in step S6201, or when the value of the second holding number counter is 4 which is the upper limit value in the processing of step S202, the main control program Determines whether the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 3022 (step S6205). When the detection signal is output from the first starting opening switch 3022, the main control program determines that the game ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2101 (hereinafter, also referred to as “starting winning”) (first special symbol). When the starting condition is satisfied), the following step S6206 is executed. In this step S6206, the main control program, triggered by this start winning, acquires various random numbers for the first special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.), and the startup memory information storage area described above. If the value of the number of first starting storage information (corresponding to each of the above random number values) stored in the first starting storage information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as “first pending number counter”) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, Determine if there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

In this first startup hold storage process, the main control program specially stores the startup storage information (a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, etc.) acquired by the game ball being received in the first start opening 2101. A predetermined storage area (RAM) is stored in the first starting storage information storage area, which is a part of the main control RAM, while associating the symbols with each other and the order of reservation (step S6207). That is, the main control program, regarding the first special symbol, at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not satisfied yet, although the start condition is satisfied, the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol Are stored in the first starting storage information storage area (starting storage information storage means, first starting storage information storage means) in a manner that can specify. Therefore, the main control program, when the game ball is newly received in the first start port 2101, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of the start winning), the first start stored information is the first start stored information. If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the first starting opening 2101 in the transmission information storage area, and sets the starting opening winning in the above-described command transmission processing. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this way, the peripheral control board 4140 can execute the preceding determination effect described below by using the starting opening winning command.

Furthermore, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first starting memory information is stored in the above-mentioned first starting memory information storage area (that is, the number of first starting memory information of the first special symbol has increased). As a result, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, for example, any one of the above-described jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area, and variation type random number storage area, or It can be cited that the random number value stored in any combination is read out, and the read random number value matches the pre-reading determination value for the first special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as "leading judgment lottery").

By the way, as the above-mentioned leading judgment processing, the main control program executes the leading judgment lottery based on the game information determined based on any of the predetermined random number values as described above, and the lottery result is displayed. , Is configured to be able to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as a preceding determination instruction command (either a special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command or a special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command) (prefetching first stage determination).

The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol look-ahead determination value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol. If it does not match the pre-reading determination value, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. This main control program does not execute the preceding judgment command transmission processing described later when this preceding judgment condition is not satisfied, while the following preceding judgment command transmission is executed when this preceding judgment condition is satisfied. Execute the process.

In the command transmission process for the preceding determination, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the first special symbol, and sets it. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmitting means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in this special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command.

Specifically, this special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command, for example, special symbol 1 type prefetch command, special symbol 1 variation pattern prefetch command, special symbol 1 variation type prefetch command, and special symbol 1 variation distribution table information prefetch command , Or any one of them or a combination of any one of them, and includes prefetch information described later. This prefetch information has the symbol type of the first special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation allocation table information.

This special symbol 1 type look-ahead command includes information about the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit, a lost symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a loss. It is information indicating which of the two. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information about the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information about the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation allocation table information prefetch command includes the variation allocation table information of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, to make a later determination that will be described later. The production can be executed.

In this peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU4150a, whether or not to execute the pre-reading display effect based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command indicates the expectation of a big hit Whether or not execution is possible is determined according to the ratio. The pre-reading effect is a continuous effect over a plurality of fluctuations, but whether or not to perform this pre-reading effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command transmitted at the time of winning in the starting mouth, and at that timing. At the same time, which display mode is selected from a plurality of display modes of continuously performed effects is determined, and at the same time, a display mode that changes over a plurality of fluctuations is also determined (a scenario is determined in advance).

As the display mode, based on the result of the preceding determination process, the effect is immediately started, and based on the result of the preceding determination process, in the case of the change, the effect is put on standby and the next change is displayed. It is possible to exemplify that the continuous production is started at the start. Further, even when it is determined that such a continuous effect is started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change at all from the state before starting the continuous effect (for example, a normal display mode). , Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode). Further, although such a continuous effect changes stepwise, the expectation for a big hit may be the same as the display mode displayed next to the previous display mode, or in the increased display mode. It may be. Further speaking, a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is lowered may be executed. In that case, the expectation degree of the big hit may be actually higher than that of the display mode in which the expectation degree is increased stepwise (that is, it corresponds to “law collapse”). Further, as the final form of the continuous notice, a mode in which the information represented by the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command can be discriminated by the player, for example, a big hit confirmation, a probability variation confirmation (confirmation of transition to a probability variation state), there is a payout It may be a mode such as confirmation.

By the way, in the present embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability varying state to another gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “the winning probability control means”) (Preceding determination suppression range)) is suppressed (preceding determination suppression means). That is, the main control program, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the game state is thus changed from the probability variation state to the normal game state. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the above-described command transmission process (see FIG. 74). It should be noted that the term "suppression" as used herein means not only reducing the frequency but also regulating the frequency.

On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the start storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this hold history update process, until the main control program, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is satisfied. The at least one startup memory information is derived in a manner that the at least one startup memory information can be specified, and then the at least one startup memory information stored in the startup memory information storage area. When the start condition corresponding to the start memory information to be prioritized is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start memory information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority should be given from the start memory information storage area. The starting memory information is deleted (holding digestion control means).

On the other hand, the main control program, when the game ball is not received in the first starting port 2101 in the above step S6205, or the counter value of the first holding number counter reaches 4 which is the upper limit value in the processing of the above step S6206. If so, the first and second starting mouth winning processing is ended.

[Variation start processing]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start process shown in FIG.
In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). . Here, the value of the holding number counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of the first starting storage information (random value) stored in the first starting storage information storage area in the above-mentioned starting storage information storage area. The value of the holding number counter of the second special symbol indicates the number of the second starting storage information (random number value) stored in the second starting storage information storage area in the starting storage information storage area described above. . In step S301 described above, the main control program determines that the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0, both start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is determined that it is not established, and after ending the fluctuation start process and ending the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. The variation start process may be the same process as the preceding determination process, and the same result may be obtained as the determination result at the time of the variation start and at the time of the preceding determination, so that the result may be used as the prefetch effect command.

On the other hand, in step S6301, if the main control program determines that the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0, the starting condition for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is It is determined that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the holding number counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of the second starting memory information is 0 (step S6302).

When it is determined in step S6302 that the number of the second starting memory information is not 0, the main control program acquires the second starting memory information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second starting described above. The predetermined number of pieces of the second starting storage information stored in the storage information storage area are shifted and stored (step S6304). Specifically, the main control program stores the second starting storage information (random number value) stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area obtained by dividing the second starting storage information storage area into a plurality of areas. Are shifted to the (n-1)th storage area and stored. As a result, at least a storage area becomes vacant, and new starting storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy has occurred. At the same time, the main control program sets "1" to the special symbol variation flag (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the number-of-holds counter of the second special symbol, that is, the second starting memory information (step). S6306). In addition, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the lower special symbol memory display 1187 so as to represent the number of the second starting memory information after the subtraction (the number of second special symbols reserved). The special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is also reset after the variation start process ends, for example, when the process flag is updated to 0.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6302 that the number of the second starting memory information is 0, the main control program acquires the first starting memory information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307), and is described above. A predetermined number of pieces of the first starting storage information stored in the first starting storage information storage area are shifted and stored (step S6308). Specifically, each of the first starting storage information storage area and the second starting storage information storage area is provided with four storage areas (first section to fourth section). In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area in which a jackpot determination random number value is stored, a jackpot symbol random number storage area in which a jackpot symbol random number value is stored, and a reach determination random number value are stored. The reach determination random number storage area, and the variable pattern random number 1 and 2 storage areas in which the variable display pattern random number values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored are provided.

The main control program divides the first starting storage information storage area into a plurality of n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas and stores the second starting storage information (random number value) in the (n-1)th storage area. Shift to the storage area of and store. As a result, at least the storage area becomes vacant, and new starting storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the vacant storage area. At the same time, the main control program sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts "1" from the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol, that is, the second starting memory information. (Step S6310). In addition, the main control program drives and controls the lighting mode of the upper special symbol storage display 1184 so as to represent the number of the first starting memory information after the subtraction (the number of first special symbols reserved). The special symbol variation flag thus set to "2" is reset after the variation start process is completed, for example, when the process flag is updated to "0".

As a result, the determination at the start of fluctuation is performed the same determination process without using all or some of the information determined in the pre-reading, despite performing the same determination process as the pre-reading. By repeating the processing and executing the processing, it is possible to obtain the same result as that at the time of prefetch determination. Even if the game information is determined by executing the same processing at the time of winning the start prize and at the start of the fluctuation, the information of the pre-read command (special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of the fluctuation are different from each other. The command values are not the same so that they can be distinguished from each other.

Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function non-actuation big hit determination table in which the probability of a big hit is set low (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability varying state, the main control program selects the probability varying function operating time determination table in which the probability of being a big hit is set high (step S6314).

Next, the main control program, based on the selected table, the first special symbol random number value or the second special symbol random number value obtained in step S6303 or step S6307 (hereinafter also referred to as "big hit determination random number value") is a big hit It is determined whether or not it matches the value (random number value corresponding to the jackpot) (step S6315). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied (lottery means). When it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is a jackpot of the type of jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number value, that is, a category of operating at least one of the probability variation function and the time saving function (state category related to the gaming state). It is determined whether or not (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination random number value acquired in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described below. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.
First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the jackpot flags is ON, the main control program executes the jackpot variation pattern table setting process (step S6402). In this jackpot variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern table for making a jackpot (a jackpot variation pattern table as a winning variation pattern table) is set, and a variation for making a jackpot if the winning conditions are met. The pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the jackpot flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means, and the start has already been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control internal RAM and the start condition has been satisfied. Regarding the stored information, a reach condition or a reach condition as a condition for executing an effect (reach effect) that implies that a predetermined winning condition may be satisfied, that is, that a special lottery may be won. It is determined whether or not a specific reach condition is satisfied among the conditions (step S6403). It should be noted that the reach condition here is a reach mode in the normal mode in which it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied and the player is relatively weak and easy to hold the expectation that he or she has won the special lottery. As an example of normal reach, and the reach production in a specific mode in which it is relatively easy for the player to relatively strongly hold the expectation that the winning conditions are relatively high and the special lottery is won. This is a condition for executing any one of the super reach as an example. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such a determination is also referred to as a “reach lottery”.

By the way, the main control program stores the winning probability of such a reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter, referred to as "reach lottery winning probability") in the start memory information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is controlled so as to be changed step by step according to the number of the stored starting memory information. Specifically, the main control program determines whether the winning probability of the reach lottery depends on the number of stored starting memory information (so-called number of reservations), for example, when it is 0, when it is 1/15, when it is 1. Is 1/14, 2 is 1/13, 3 is 1/10, and 4 is 1/10.

Further, the main control program writes the reach lottery result command including the result of the above-mentioned reach lottery into the transmission information storage area of the above-mentioned RAM with built-in main control, and transmits it in the above-mentioned command transmission process (random number range information control means). ). In other words, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, instead of transmitting the determination reach random number value itself to the peripheral control board 4140. At the same time, the reach lottery result command regarding the result of the reach lottery is transmitted. In addition, this reach lottery result command, the first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the starting memory information about the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to the starting memory information about the second special symbol Is a generic command name.

When it is determined that the reach conditions described above are satisfied, that is, when the reach effect is determined to be executed, the main control program executes the reach-miss variation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In the reach-miss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (reach-loss variation pattern table) for executing the reach effect and causing the loss.

At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time saving function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and that the time saving function is activated (time saving), the change for executing the reach effect described above and causing a loss A fluctuation pattern table including a pattern (time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern) (time saving time reach loss variation pattern table as a time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied and the time saving function is not operating as described above (non-time saving time), the reach effect described above is executed to cause a loss. A fluctuation pattern table (non-time saving time reach-miss fluctuation pattern table as non-time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (non-time saving non-winning fluctuation pattern) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). In the following description, the time saving short reach loss variation pattern table and the non-time saving reach loss variation pattern table are also collectively referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern table”. In the present embodiment, the main control program, not only "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" as the lottery result of the lottery on the variation pattern of the special symbol, further, this "miss" causes the time saving function to operate. Whether it is the "non-time saving loss" as the "miss" in the state where it has not been performed or the "time saving loss" in the state in which the time saving function is operating is separately controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not established, that is, if the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes the non-reach lost variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In the non-reach-miss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach-loss variation pattern table) that causes a loss without executing the reach effect. The non-reach lost variation pattern table is prepared in a plurality of types in association with each other according to a plurality of gaming states. Is becoming

Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not established in this manner, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time saving function is operating, and in the same manner as above, whether the time saving function is operating or not is determined. The fluctuation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. That is, when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time saving function is activated as described above (time saving), the main control program loses the reach effect without executing the reach effect described above. A fluctuation pattern table (a time-shortening non-reach-miss variation pattern table as a time-saving non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time-saving non-winning fluctuation pattern) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time saving function is not activated (non-time saving time), the reach control is not performed and the game is lost. A variation pattern table (non-time saving non-reach-miss variation pattern table as non-time saving non-winning variation pattern table) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means).

The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), and the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are also collectively referred to as "variation pattern commands". The pattern command of this variation pattern includes information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes the winning result regarding the jackpot.

Furthermore, the main control program sets the value of the variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the variation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, the main control program, when the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table, according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this jackpot fluctuation pattern table, the jackpot fluctuation time To the timer. On the other hand, the main control program, if the variation pattern table set as described above is a small hit variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this small hit variation pattern table, the small hit Set the variable time for use in the timer.

Further, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a time saving time reach lose variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this time saving reach loss variation pattern table, Set the timer for the variable time for reaching short time. On the other hand, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a non-time saving reach reach variation pattern table, depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this non-time reduction reach loss variation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-time saving reach is set in the timer. In this way, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is "miss", the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time saving function is operating.

Here, the main control program manages the basic fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time with 2-byte data as the fluctuation time of such a special symbol, and the maximum fluctuation time that is the total value of these times is calculated. 262.144 s (65536 x 4 ms) x 2 = 524.288 s, and the variation time of the special symbol that is twice as long as that of the previous time in which those times are managed by 1 byte is realized.

When the value of the variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program next sets the special figure LED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, triggered by the establishment of the start condition. At least one of the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display device) and the second special symbol display device 1186 (variable display device) is caused to start a variable display consisting of a plurality of LED lighting patterns according to the determined variation pattern. (Symbol variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414), and ends the fluctuation pattern setting processing as described above.

When set in the variation pattern setting process in this way, the main control program executes the pattern command and the winning information command already written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. It is read and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

[Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the variable time set in the timer in step S6412 (see FIG. 100) has expired (step S6501), and the variable time set in the timer is set in time. If it is not up, the changing process is ended.

On the other hand, if the variable time set in the timer has expired, the main control program sets the special figure LED operation flag that was set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program, the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display device 1186 (variable display) according to the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above. At least one of the means) is used to stop the variable display (variation of the special symbol) which is a variation pattern of lighting, extinguishing or blinking of the 7-segment LED, and the stopping mode according to the established conditions that are satisfied. The stop symbol consisting of is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means). That is, the main control program starts the variation display of the special symbol triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition after the satisfaction of the start condition, and then determines the winning condition by the lapse of the variation time according to the variation pattern. A stop symbol corresponding to the result is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means).

Next, the main control program writes and sets the definite stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol has ended and a predetermined stopped symbol has been fixed. The main control program reads the definite stop command from the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed is confirmed.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S6504). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control program updates the process flag to 3 (step S505), and ends the changing process.

By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is received in the starting port and the start condition is satisfied, if there is no start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a holding ball) in which the start condition is satisfied before that. The variation display of the special symbol is started, and the stop symbol is displayed when the predetermined variation time has elapsed. In addition, in such a general gaming machine, after the start condition is satisfied, a special lottery is executed thereafter, and when the special lottery is won, the normal game state is shifted to the special game state (existing). See the first reference mentioned above). When the game state is transferred in this way, for example, the game content that was associated with the stored reserve ball before the transfer of the game state may be executed after the transfer of the game state. At a glance, It seems that there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the processing flag is updated to 3 as described above (that is, when the game state is shifted, for example), the main control program is also determined to shift next. After writing a command (hereinafter, referred to as a "destination command") indicating the existing game state in the transmission information storage area, the main control program thereafter sends this migration destination command to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92). Send to. As will be described later, the main control program keeps the gaming state in the normal gaming state when the winning condition is not satisfied, but when the winning condition is satisfied, the game condition is changed from the normal gaming state to the established winning condition. The game state is shifted to an advantageous game state, and then returned to the normal game state (game state control means). Therefore, the main control program sends a transition destination command indicating that the game state has been transitioned to the predetermined game state to the peripheral control board 4140 in response to the transition of the game state (post-transition game state notification means). . On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 4100, the transferred game state is considered, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in the game status before and after the transfer. Control the production operation.

Normally, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a normally causes the main control board 4100 to execute the performance operation when the predetermined performance conditions are satisfied, without being restricted by the main control board 4100.

As a first example for making the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 4100, the fact that the game state is transferred based on this transfer destination command is given. Since it can be surely grasped, the execution of the production operation such as the preceding judgment production and the reach production described above is regulated by the control on the main control board 4100 side taking this opportunity. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the effect operation to give the player a feeling of strangeness due to the difference in the game state before and after the transition.

On the other hand, as a second example for making the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may, for example, start conditions based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 4100. When the game state at the first time when the start condition is satisfied for the start memory information that is satisfied is different from the game state at the second time when the start condition is satisfied, the staging operation is performed in consideration of the shifted game state. It may be controlled.

By doing this, in the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the transfer destination command later, when the game state is transferred, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can immediately recognize that the game state has been transferred, and therefore the process proceeds. It is possible to control the effect operation so that the game content linked to the game state does not give the player a feeling of strangeness. The peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 4100 and, for example, when it is determined that the next gaming state is the probability change and the time saving state, a predetermined winning condition for the stored starting memory information. If it is not a winning species that activates the probability variation function (a so-called normal big hit), the preceding judgment effect is applied to the following starting memory information stored subsequent to the starting memory information. It may be restricted so that it is not executed.

By the way, the state in which the processing flag is 3 indicates that it is in the processing stage in which the variable display of the special symbol is stopped so that the jackpot is won. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value to a situation identification flag for identifying a game state in a jackpot game preparation process, which will be described later, together with the process of updating the process flag in step S6505 to 3.

The main control program was established by using the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display device 1186 (variable display device) according to the special symbol that was variably displayed as described above. A stop symbol corresponding to the winning condition will be displayed (stop symbol control means).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the jackpot flag is not ON, the main control program updates the process flag to 0 (step S6508), and ends the changing process. In this case, the main control program does not accompany the transition of the game state, and thus restricts the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. It should be noted that the processing flag being 0 indicates that the special symbol is in a processing stage in which the special symbols are variably stopped so that the jackpot is not won.

[Big hit game preparation process]
102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the status identification flag is 0 (step S6621). The value of the situation identification flag is set to 0 when the processing flag is updated to 3, as described above.

As described above, this situation identification flag is a flag for identifying the game state in the jackpot game preparation process. For example, the situation identification flag being 0 means initial setting, the situation identification flag being 1 means being in the explanation interval presentation, and the situation identification flag being 2 It means that the game mode determination process is being performed, and that the situation identification flag is 3 means that the jackpot start interval effect is being performed.

When the jackpot game preparation process is first executed, the situation identification flag is set to 0. As a result, the main control program writes and sets the explanation interval effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6622). The main control program transmits the instruction interval effect command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms in the command transmission process described above. Next, the main control program sets the explanation interval effect timer (step S6623), sets 1 to the situation identification flag (step S6624), and ends the jackpot game preparation process. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is subtracted by 1 in the timer subtraction process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms by the main control program.

Here, the above-mentioned explanation interval effect, when a display effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is displayed on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the big hit is not a big hit of a specific type ( That is, when the jackpot is a normal type), the game procedure until the jackpot game is actually started is explained on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. When the jackpot is a jackpot of a specific type, in addition to the display effect that the jackpot is a big hit, display effect that the 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed is also performed.

By the way, the next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. When the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 1, and when it is determined in step S621 that the situation identification flag is not 0, the main control program determines whether the situation identification flag is 1 or not. Is determined (step S6625). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 1, the main control program determines whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S6626). If the explanation interval effect has not timed up, the main control program ends the jackpot game preparation process. Hereinafter, until the explanation interval effect is timed up, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and YES in step S6625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 1 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine of determining NO in step S6662 is repeatedly executed.

When the timer for the explanation interval effect expires in step S6662, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device on the assumption that the explanation interval effect has ended (step S6627). Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S6628), and if the time saving function is operating, stops the operation of this time saving function (step S6629).

On the other hand, when the time saving function is not operating, the main control program writes and sets the gate effective effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6636). The main control program reads the gate effective effect command from the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms, and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140. The peripheral control unit 4140 can recognize that the execution of the gate effective effect, which will be described later, is permitted, upon receiving the gate effective effect command. Further, the main control program sets 2 to the situation identification flag (step S6630), and ends the jackpot game preparation process as described above.

Here, the gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled after the above-described explanation interval effect is completed (by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is an effect display for notifying the player of the fact that the detection of the game ball is validated) by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Although details will be described later, as the gate effective effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 which will be described later, for example, a display which urges the player to select which type of jackpot game shown in FIG. In addition, a display indicating that the current time is a harassment type timing, or a display indicating that the current time is a pounding type timing as shown in FIG. 80 to be described later can be cited.

As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the big hit lottery is won, the start timing of the big hit game can be freely decided by the player's intention. In other words, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the gate effective effect command displays a display screen (see FIG. 78) that the effect control program prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game to execute. After displaying on the side liquid crystal display device 1900, or while displaying the display screen, it may be displayed that a break can be taken before the jackpot game.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing flag being 3 and the situation identification flag being set to 2, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and NO in step S6625. The determination is made, the process proceeds to step S6631, and it is determined whether or not the value of the situation identification flag is 2 (step S6631). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 2, the main control program determines YES in step S6631, and performs the following jackpot game mode determination processing (step S6632).

[Big hit game mode determination process]
103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process shown in FIG. 97, and FIG. 104 is an example of a table used in this jackpot game mode determination process.

In the jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program is for the jackpot game mode determination triggered by the distribution detection sensor 2580L detecting the passage of the game ball to the left gate or the distribution detection sensor 2580R to detect the passage of the game ball to the right gate. Acquires a random number value (random number determination round number value). This main control program, the obtained jackpot game mode determination random number value (round number determination random number value), the type of jackpot flag in the flag ON state (specific type jackpot flag or normal type jackpot flag), The execution mode (round number) of the jackpot game is determined based on whether the gate has passed or not.

In this jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the delay of the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor, that is, the game ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586. It is determined whether or not (step S6071). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (step S6072).

When the game ball is detected to be delayed in step S6071, the main control program does not determine whether the distribution detection sensor 2580L detects the game ball even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. That is, when the game ball is detected to be delayed in step S6071, the main control program invalidates the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

In step S6072, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R does not detect that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, the main control program ends the jackpot game mode determination processing and the jackpot game preparation processing, and the timer Return to the interrupt process and execute.

Hereinafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, and NO in step S625. The determination is YES in step S6631, and in the jackpot gaming mode determination process, the processing routine of YES in step S6071 and NO in step S6072 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R in step S6072, the main control program determines that the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, that is, the jackpot flag turned ON in step S6317 is of a specific type. It is determined whether or not it is the jackpot flag (step S6073). Here, if the specific type jackpot flag is ON in step S6073, the main control program determines the jackpot game mode by referring to the right gate 2575R of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6074). That is, the main control program, the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display device 1186 (variable display means) after the change time after the start condition is satisfied for the start memory information this time. While displaying a stop symbol according to the established winning condition using the above, if the winning condition is established, then, as will be described later, shift from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state according to the established winning condition. Let (game state control means). For example, the main control program shifts to the first special gaming state when the established winning condition is the first winning condition, and the second special condition when the established winning condition is the second winning condition. A game state is entered (game state control means).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6073 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. 104, and plays the jackpot game mode. Is determined (step S6075).

Here, as can be seen by referring to Table A in FIG. 104, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the left gate 2575L is displayed in the game ball. When (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the mode of the jackpot game executed is different, but the expected value of the prize ball amount paid out during the jackpot game is the same ( The exact match does not have to be the same, as long as it is equivalent as long as it does not impair the game).

Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the main control program sets the 6-round big hit game and the 12-round big hit game to 50%, respectively. It is determined by the probability of. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the main control program is 50% for each of the two rounds of jackpot games and the 16 rounds of jackpot games. It is determined by the probability of.

If no delay is detected in step S6071, that is, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program determines that the game ball is left by the distribution detection sensor 2580L. It is determined whether the gate 2575L has been passed (step S6076).

When it is not detected that the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L in step S6076, that is, when the game ball is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6076 and determines the jackpot game mode. After the processing, the jackpot game preparation processing is executed again, the jackpot game preparation processing is ended, and the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms.

Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and NO in step S6625. The determination is YES in step S6631. In the jackpot gaming mode determination process, a process routine of NO in step S6071 and NO in step S6076 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the left gate 2575L in step S6076, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines that the jackpot flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S6317. It is determined whether or not the turned-on jackpot flag is a jackpot flag of a specific type (step S6077). Here, if the jackpot flag of the specific type is ON (YES in step S6077), the main control program determines the jackpot game mode by referring to the left gate 2575L of table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6078).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6077 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the left gate 2575L of table A and executes the jackpot game. The mode (the number of rounds in this embodiment) is determined (step S6079).

When the execution mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds in this embodiment) is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, or step S6079, the main control program starts the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6080). .. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, triggered by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6081).

When it is determined in step S6081 that the probability varying function is operating, the main control program stops the probability varying function in step S6082 and executes step S6083 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is not operating, the main control program skips step S6082 and directly executes step S6083.

In step S6083, the main control program sets the operation mode of the special winning opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 and step S6079 (step S6083).

With the operation mode of the special winning opening 2103, for example, in addition to the maximum number of rounds of the round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the jackpot game, a game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game. It is to set the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game such as the upper limit number (for example, 9) and the opening/closing operation time limit of the opening/closing members 2106A and 2106B in each round game.

Next, the main control program is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is already being played. Flags, etc. are set (step S6084).

As will be described later in detail, the main control program transmits the jackpot start command and the round information command thus set to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission processing (see FIG. 240), thereby playing the game. In the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined number of rounds through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140. become.

In this way, the main control program does not detect the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (the left gate 2575L, the right gate 2575R) even if the explanation interval effect timer has timed up, so that the jackpot game is won. The progress is stopped and the following process is not executed in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit in the process of step S6315 and the condition device is activated (step S6604), the main control program does not proceed with the jackpot game as it is, but the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate). The big hit game is stopped until passage of the game ball to (2575R) is detected (steps S6072, S6076).

As described above, here, if the player in contact with the display screen of FIG. 76 or FIG. 77 does not drive the game ball into the sorting unit 2550 (right strike) by the player's intention, the jackpot game Since it does not start, it is easy to immediately notice that the message that the player can take a break before the jackpot game starts is displayed, and the player can recognize the content of the message more reliably. be able to. Further, as the display timing, when the player is enthusiastic about the game, he/she can suspend the game at his/her will and can take a break or go to the toilet in this state.

After that, when the game ball is launched to the distribution unit 2550 by the player's intention, the main control program detects the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, and based on this, the jackpot game. Is stopped, that is, YES is determined in step S6072, or YES is determined in step S6076, and any one of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 is executed, and It is possible to determine the execution mode (round number) of the game and start the jackpot game in the determined execution mode. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely decided by the player's intention, and the moment when the jackpot game is started is not missed, so that the interest of the player for the game can be prevented from being impaired.

Next, the main control program sets the jackpot start interval effect command (step S6085), sets the jackpot start interval effect timer to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), and sets the situation identification flag to 3 (step S6087). ), the jackpot game mode determination process is ended, the jackpot game preparation process is executed again, the jackpot game preparation process is ended, and a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms. This jackpot start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the time the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening/closing of the opening/closing device 2106 is started. It is a display effect or the like indicating that the jackpot game is started.

The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process described above. As a result, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect display indicating that the jackpot game is started is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

By the way, according to steps S6621 to S6629, the main control program continues to operate the time saving function until the explanation interval presentation time elapses in the series of lottery processing required to execute the big hit game. That is, although the fact that it is a big hit is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the time saving function is activated by suspending the operation start of the condition device while the explanation interval effect is being performed. If so, during the execution of the explanation interval effect, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2102.

When the jackpot game mode determination processing described above ends, the processing flag is 3, and as a result of setting the status identification flag to 3, in the jackpot game preparation processing of the next cycle of 4 ms, the main control program returns NO in step S6621. The determination is NO in step S6625, the determination is NO in step S6631, the process proceeds to step S6633, and it is determined whether the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 has timed up (step S633).

If the jackpot start interval effect has not timed up, the main control program determines NO in step S6633, hunts the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine for execution. Hereinafter, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and determines YES in step S625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 3 of the situation identification flag until the jackpot start interval effect is timed up. The processing routine for determining NO in step S 6626 is repeatedly executed.

When the jackpot start interval effect times out, the main control program determines YES in step S633, and determines that the jackpot start interval effect has ended, and updates the processing flag to "4" (step S6634). Next, the main control program sets 0 to the situation identification flag and returns it to the initial value (step S6635), ends the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine for execution.

[Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

In the big hit game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the special winning opening 2103 is open, the main control program determines whether the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 (elapsed time after opening) has reached the opening/closing operation time limit set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). When it is determined that the opening/closing operation time limit has elapsed, the main control program closes the special winning opening 2103 by closing the opening/closing members 2106A and 2106B (step S6804).

However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed, the main control program causes the special winning opening 2103 to open after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. When the number of game balls entered is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the opening/closing operation time limit set above in step S6802 has not yet elapsed and the number of game balls accepted in the special winning opening 2103 in step S6803 has not yet reached the upper limit number, the main control program is executed. The jackpot game process is ended with the special winning opening 2103 kept open.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the special winning opening 2103 is not open, the main control program determines that the number of times the big winning opening 2103 is opened (the number of round games) by the opening/closing members 2106A and 2106B is the same as in step S6803 (see FIG. It is determined whether the maximum number of rounds set in (see 103) has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program activates the opening/closing member 2106 according to the winning condition established as described above, opens the corresponding special winning opening 2103 (step S6806), and wins the big hit game. The process ends.

On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6805 that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds, the winning condition is satisfied by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state of restricting the execution of the opening/closing operation (big hit game) of the opening/closing member 2106 executed as a condition is shifted. That is, in this case, the main control program is stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the jackpot flag in step S6317 (see FIG. 99) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. The jackpot game process is ended after the gaming state after the jackpot game is set on the basis of the jackpot winning type that has been the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game.

When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit in-play flag to OFF states (step S6807). The winning type of the jackpot which is the trigger for executing the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

Here, in step S6808, the main control program determines whether or not it is a winning species that activates the probability varying function (the jackpot symbols are 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). That is, this main control program determines whether or not the probability variation transition condition for determining whether or not the gaming state (probability variation state) in which the winning condition is relatively higher than the normal gaming state is to be established is established. It is determined (winning probability control means). The main control program sets the probability variation state when this probability variation transition condition is satisfied, and at the same time, sets the transition destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating the game state in which it is decided that the transition will be made next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variation state (winning probability control means) when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, and at the same time determines the gaming state that is determined to shift next. A migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area as a command to represent. After that, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process (S92) to the peripheral control board 4140.

That is, when the main control program determines in the above step S6808 that it is not a winning species for operating the probability varying function, it stops the operation of the condition device without operating either the probability varying function or the time saving function (step S6811). On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is a winning type (so-called probability variation jackpot) that activates the probability variation function, the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not the probability variation transition condition for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the winning condition is relatively higher than the normal game state is to be established is satisfied. , If the probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition will be satisfied is changed to a probability fluctuation state that is set relatively higher than the normal game state, and the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display. While the probability variation state is continued while the variation is displayed, when the probability variation transition condition is not established, the probability variation state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variation state (winning probability control means).

Next, the main control program activates the time saving function (step S6810) and then suspends the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time saving function is activated, the main control program selects each time saving time variation pattern table including the variation pattern group in which the variation time is shortened from the start of the operation until the number of times of change of the predetermined special symbol is reached. Corresponding to the length of the fluctuation pattern determined from each of the time saving time fluctuation pattern table, the value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a timer shorter than the value of the prescribed fluctuation time (time saving function control means) . In addition, this main control program writes the transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating the game state that is determined to be transferred next, and then writes it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission processing (S92). You may make it transmit. In addition, the main control program repeats the opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second starting opening 2102 according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern until the number of times of change of the predetermined special symbol is reached. , The game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is easily received by the second starting opening 2102. Finally, the main control program sets the process flag to 0 (step S6812), and ends the big hit game process.

By doing so, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the special winning opening 2103 in an opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds predetermined in step 805 is reached. At the time of the open state, the instruction of the prize ball operation according to the number of game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 is performed.

Here, in a general gaming machine, a game ball shot in a game area flows down between a large number of nails provided in the game area, and a part of them enters the starting opening or the general starting opening. On the other hand, the remaining game balls are discharged to the outside of the game area from the discharge port (so-called out port) formed at the bottom of the game area (see the above-mentioned first reference document), but in such a game machine, At first glance, it can be considered that the circulation of the game balls is unlikely to be in a suitable state depending on the arrangement of the accessory and the nails provided in the game area.

However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, the main control program, when the winning condition is satisfied, at least one of the determined first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) After controlling the variable display of the special symbol according to the variation pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) determined using the above, the winning condition is triggered by the passage of the variation time at the time of winning according to the variation pattern at the time of winning. A stop symbol corresponding to is displayed (symbol fluctuation control means).

Next, the main control program, the winning condition is not satisfied, and, when the time saving function is operating, the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display device determined above. At least one of 1186 (variable display means) is used to control the variable display of the special symbol in accordance with the determined time saving/non-winning variation pattern, and then change time according to the time saving/non-winning variation pattern (time saving non-winning time). When the (variation time) elapses, a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed (symbol variation control means).

Next, the main control program, if the winning condition is not satisfied, and the time saving function is not operating, the first special symbol display device 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display device determined above. At least one of 1186 (variable display means) is used to control the variable display of the special symbols in accordance with the determined non-time saving non-winning time variation pattern, and then change time (non-time saving period) according to the non-time saving non-winning variation pattern. When the non-winning variation time) has elapsed, a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed.

As described above, not only big hits, small hits and loses, but also four different types of loses (short hits, short hits, short wins and short misses) If it becomes possible to set, when the special lottery is not won, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving function is activated and the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving function is not activated (non-time saving Since a variation time difference is intentionally set between the time non-winning variation time), depending on the setting of both variation times, it becomes easier for the game ball to be ejected from the game area when one function is operating. Therefore, the circulation of the game balls becomes good regardless of the nail arrangement, and the performance of discharging the game balls to the outside of the game area (so-called out performance) can be improved more than ever. Specifically, the following effects are exhibited by the following usages.

First, as a first usage and effect, in the case of non-time saving time loss, the special symbol is stopped at 500 ms as an example of the variable time (non-time saving non-winning variation time), while in the case of time saving loss (for example, game area) When the special symbol is stopped for 1000 ms as an example of the variation time (time saving non-winning variation time) in the so-called right hitting as a game state of shooting a game ball to the right side of, the time saving loss is the non-time saving loss Because there is a difference in the stop time of the 500ms special symbol, an extra game ball is fired for about one, and the game ball is easily discharged from the game area (the outlet located at the bottom), and the collection efficiency of the game ball ( So-called out performance) is improved.

As a second usage and effect, for example, when it is desired to increase the number of game balls to be fired per unit time, the main control program changes the variable time when the result of the special lottery is a loss of time saving (time saving non-win). If the variable time) is set to 2000 ms as an example, for example, when a game ball is shot every 600 ms, about three extra game balls are shot, so the out performance is improved.

As a third use and effect, for example, when the payout rate of the game balls in a short time (so-called ball-out rate) is too high, the main control program, the variation time of the special symbol of time saving loss (time saving non-winning loss variation By setting the (time) to be long, it is possible to extend the time zone in which the payout of the game balls is concentrated, so that the payout rate in a short time does not become too high.

By the way, the main control program may set the aforementioned prize ball effective range period in consideration of the detection delay until the game ball entered from the entrance of the special winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110. (Payout instruction regulation means). That is, when the main control program is in the first special game state, the opening/closing member 2106 is closed and the opening/closing member 2106 is closed for a predetermined period of time after the opening/closing member 2106 is opened. A prize ball ineffective range period, which is a period excluding the award ball effective range period until the lapse, is set (payout instruction regulation means).

By doing this, even if the game ball is held inside the special winning opening 2103 for some time, it is possible to prevent the held game ball from being erroneously detected as a wrongdoing. it can.

[15. Leading judgment process]
The effect control program described above analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the above-described received command analysis processing (command receiving means), and the command is the special symbol 1 storage command. Or, if it is a special symbol 2 storage command, upon receipt of this command, a start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start storage information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command Is led to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) (start hold control means).

That is, this effect control program, if the received command is a special symbol storage prefetch effect command (special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command), prefetch included in the special symbol memory prefetch effect command Based on the information (for example, information about the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, the information suggesting the type of the jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage destination reading effect command or the special symbol 2 The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is caused to derive a starting hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new starting memory information corresponding to the memory prefetching effect command, and then the new starting memory information is handled. When the variable time to be performed has elapsed, the derivation of the start hold display mode is ended (start hold control means).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 memory read-ahead effect command or the special symbol 2 memory read-ahead effect command is received, the effect control program causes the start hold display mode (for example, "usually as a hold display mode in which expectation for a jackpot is difficult" "Execution display mode" is illustrated from the beginning of the above-mentioned derivation or in the middle thereof as a special start hold display mode (for example, "super hot reservation display mode" as a hold display mode that makes it very easy for a player to hold an expectation for a jackpot. Yes) is executed instead of the above, and the leading judgment control to be led to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (leading judgment control means). Hereinafter, such a function is referred to as a "leading judgment control function".

By the way, even in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the game ball launched in the game area is accepted by the starting port and the starting condition is satisfied, if the starting pending information is already stored, this starting pending information There is one that executes a so-called preceding judgment effect until the start condition of the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is satisfied (see the above-mentioned first reference). Here, in the pachinko gaming machine, if a means for explicitly showing that the gaming state has been transitioned is provided to the outside, the gaming state transitions as follows after the start condition is satisfied, and then the variation display of the variation pattern of the special symbol When the start condition for starting is satisfied, the leading judgment effect is determined to be executed in the game state before the transition, and is executed in the game state after the transition. At first glance, the player feels uncomfortable. It is also possible to give.

However, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main control program as described above causes the preceding determination suppression range from the transition point as described above. Over the entire peripheral control board 4140, it is suppressed to transmit the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command. Therefore, the production control program recognizes that the game state has transitioned from the probability variation state to the normal game state by receiving the above-described high-probability end designation command, and then, as described above, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching production Based on the fact that the transmission of the command (advance determination instruction command) and the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command (advance determination instruction command) is suppressed, as a result, the advance determination by the advance determination control function is performed over the advance determination suppression range. The control will be suppressed (preceding determination suppression means).

By doing this, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the game state is transferred as described above, the effect control program starts the main control internal RAM in the previous game state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is illustrated). Since the preceding determination effect is not executed for the starting storage information in the preceding determination suppression range of the starting storage information stored in the storage information storage area, the preceding determination corresponding to the stored startup storage information within the preceding determination suppression range. It is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable in terms of performance.

As such a preceding determination suppression range, for example, the maximum storage number that can store the start memory information in the start memory information storage area before (or after) the timing when the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal game state Minutes (for example, four pieces) can be mentioned as the number of times of changing the special symbol corresponding to the starting memory information (for example, four times).

Further, as the preceding determination suppression range, instead, for example, after the game state transitions from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area exists at the time of this transition. In this case, the number of fluctuations of the stored starting memory information (for example, 1 to 4 in the case of the present embodiment) can be cited as the number of times the stored starting memory information is stored.

In addition, as the preceding determination suppression range, instead of or in addition to this, for example, after the game state transitions from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the start memory stored in the start memory information storage area at the time of this transition If the information exists, the number of times the stored starting memory information is stored may be changed (for example, 1 to 4 in this embodiment).

Further, as the preceding determination suppression range, for example, the transition of the gaming state from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the starting memory information stored in the starting memory information storage area immediately before the transition. It may be one display.

In addition, as the preceding determination suppression range described above, instead of the number of times of variation described above, for example, from the timing when the game state transitions from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the time set corresponding to each of the number of variations described above. It may be.

By the way, in a general gaming machine, the left decorative design, the right decorative design, and the middle decorative design that are variably displayed when the start condition is met and the start condition is met are stopped in a predetermined order. However, if the reach condition is satisfied, for example, the middle decorative symbol is variably displayed in a manner in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are aligned (corresponding to the reach effect described above), and the player is given three options. It enjoys the expectation that the decorative designs may shift to the advantageous game state in a predetermined manner (see the above-mentioned first reference). In such a general gaming machine, due to the effect, it is desired to execute the reach effect for a specific start memory information only at a desired timing, and to give a strong psychological impact to the player in contact with this. However, if the reach effect is executed for other start memory information before that, the psychological impact may be weakened.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production control program controls the reach production using one of the following two methods (or a combination thereof) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

First of all, as one method, the production control program, corresponding to the start memory information that the start condition is satisfied, that the above-mentioned reach condition is satisfied, that is, that the result of the special lottery may have been won. It has a function of executing a reach effect that suggests (reach effect control means). Based on each reach lottery result command and winning information command received as described above, the effect control program having such a function wins the last starting memory information stored in the above-mentioned starting memory information storage area. The condition is satisfied (that is, the result of the special lottery is a win), and the reach determination random value for the remaining start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area described above is within the non-reach range. (And furthermore, the winning condition is not satisfied for the remaining starting memory information (the special lottery is not won)), the reach effect is executed for the last starting memory information. Control so as to cause it (execution control means). After that, the production control program, in the reach production corresponding to the last starting memory information, fluctuates the central decorative design in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 with the two left and right decorative designs being aligned over the variation time. After the display, the central decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the player is made to recognize that it is a big hit as a mode in which these three decorative designs are aligned.

Here, in this embodiment, the thundercloud mode is exemplified as the special game state that is shifted by the effect control program. In this thundercloud mode, the effect control program displays a telop indicating that it is in the thundercloud mode while moving from left to right at the upper part of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and displays the variable display left and right. At the stage where the reach effect is executed using the three decorative symbols in the center, there is a case where effect control that suggests that there is a high possibility of reaching a big hit in the starting memory information corresponding to the variable display. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed in the thundercloud mode, it is possible to make the player very strongly recognize that the jackpot may be a big hit with a high probability, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the result of the special lottery is won for the last starting memory information in the thundercloud mode as described above, the reach effect cannot be executed for the remaining stored starting memory information. It will be. By doing so, the psychological impact given to the player by the reach effect executed in the last starting memory information can be relatively less likely to be weakened before that. As a result, the player is psychologically uplifted by the strength of the impact in contact with the reach effect that is suddenly executed, and until the result of the special lottery about the last starting memory information is disclosed. You can continue playing while enjoying the expectation of a big hit.

By the way, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the remaining stored starting memory information within the preceding determination suppression range described above, the effect control program is established even if the starting condition is satisfied for the stored starting memory information. The reach production may not be executed. In this way, for example, even though the game state has changed from the probability variation state to the normal game state, for example, as the thundercloud mode, when the production control is performed as if it is the probability variation state, the preceding determination suppression It is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort because it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed despite the fact that the preceding determination effect is suppressed for the remaining start-up memory information stored within the range as described above. It will be further suppressed.

By the way, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the specific starting storage information among the remaining starting storage information that has been stored within the preceding determination suppression range described above, the production control program starts the starting condition for the specific starting storage information. In the same manner as described above, the reach effect may not be executed when the above condition is established. In this way, for example, even though the game state has changed from the probability variation state to the normal game state, for example, as the thundercloud mode, when the production control is performed as if it is the probability variation state, the preceding determination suppression It is more effective to give the player a feeling of strangeness because it is possible to prevent the normal reach from being executed despite the advance determination effect being suppressed for the specific starting memory information within the range, as described above. Will be suppressed to.

In addition, the production control program has won a special lottery with respect to the last starting stored information stored in the starting stored information storage area, and the specific reach condition has been established, and the stored starting storage information before that. When the special lottery is selected for the specific starting memory information among the remaining starting memory information stored in the area and the reach condition is satisfied, the normal reach for the specific starting memory information is performed as described above. Instead of restricting the execution of, the execution may be performed as scheduled. In this way, in the case where the plurality of starting memory information including the last starting memory information and the remaining starting memory information among the starting memory information already stored in the starting memory information storage area are won in the special lottery a plurality of times. However, it is possible to entertain the player for the normal reach to be executed first and then to entertain the super reach to be executed later. As a result, even in the lucky situation where the big hits are almost continuous, as described above, the psychological impact of the super reach corresponding to the last starting memory information on the player is ensured, and the particular It is possible to maintain the psychological impact of the normal reach executed before that corresponding to the starting memory information on the player.

By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, with the start winning of the game ball as a trigger, after that the special symbol starts changing display and the jackpot lottery is executed, and the predetermined winning condition is satisfied and the predetermined probability transition There is a thing that shifts to a stochastic fluctuation state when the condition is satisfied (see the above-mentioned first reference document). As a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to such a probability fluctuation state, as described above, it takes a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as "special time") until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game is over. There are those that continue the probability fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "ST (special time) machine"). In such a special time, until the production control board (corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140) shifts from the probability variation state to another game state according to the production command received from the game control board (corresponding to the main control board 4100). The specific effect (hereinafter, special time effect) is executed during the period. Here, in a general game hall (hall), a large number of pachinko game machines are arranged facing each other on each island, so the power supplied to each pachinko game machine may vary depending on the power supply equipment and power usage. Will be temporarily reduced, resulting in a momentary power failure (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power outage"). When such a momentary blackout occurs unfortunately at a predetermined timing, at first glance, a part of the special time effect as described above is not executed, and a part of the special time effect that the player should have originally enjoyed You may not be able to enjoy it.

In the present embodiment, the production control program, if it is determined that the specific gaming state has transitioned to the probability variation gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state has ended, as an example of the specific gaming state, for example, a special symbol in the probability variation gaming state. The special time effect (specific effect) in which the number of times the variable is displayed is predetermined is started. That is, the effect control program controls the special time effect (specific effect) in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation game state is predetermined (specific effect control means). . On the other hand, the effect control program, even if it falls into a situation where this special time effect cannot be controlled temporarily, based on the new game state information received next as will be described later in detail, the remaining part of this special time effect. The production is being executed.

Specifically, the effect control program, even if the special time effect is temporarily unable to control (specific effect control means), based on the remaining number of times information included in the command received next, the game state While grasping the remaining number of times the special symbol is variably displayed before moving to the game state other than the probability variation state, the rest of the mode that suggests the remaining number as a part of special time performance over the grasped remaining number The number of times effect is executed (remaining number of times effect complementing means).

By doing this, for example, even if the effect control program in the peripheral control board 4140 is temporarily unable to control the special time effect due to the influence of a momentary power failure state, the next variable symbol start display is changed. As an opportunity, it is possible to restart the remaining number effect in a mode that suggests the remaining number as the remaining effect of the special time effect. The player who was in contact with such remaining number of times production should bear in mind that such interruption may be a part of the production when the remaining number of times production is temporarily restored and the remaining number of times production is restored. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game to be affected by the momentary power failure state.

[16. Delay control]
By the way, in the conventional pachinko game machine, depending on the progress of the game, the predetermined control subject outputs the production control data and causes the predetermined production device which has received the production control data to execute the production operation, thereby making the player bored. Although it is hard to make it feel (see the above-mentioned first reference), it may be necessary to adjust the display timing of the image in the conventional pachinko gaming machine depending on various circumstances, but in such a case, Since it is necessary to synchronize with the operation timing of the production device, the control tends to be complicated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of facilitating synchronization with the rendering device without requiring complicated control, the details will be described later, but the peripheral control board 4140 (rendering control means) serves as an information storage means. A ring buffer as an example is provided, and a delay control unit as an example of information output control means is provided. The ring buffer includes a plurality of buffers as an example of a plurality of unit storage areas in which production control data for controlling a production operation by a production device described later can be temporarily stored. On the other hand, the delay control unit delays the timing at which the stored effect control data is to be retrieved from a predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) of any of the plurality of buffers by a predetermined delay amount from the original timing (described later). (Time required for data processing for the predetermined display area), and the stored effect control data is extracted and output. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

[16-1. Configuration example related to delay control]
FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing a configuration example regarding delay control. Note that FIG. 106 mainly shows a functional configuration example for realizing the delay control, but here, for convenience of description, a configuration example regarding hardware related to the delay control is also shown. Showing.

[16-2. Main control board side control]
As described above with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105, in the main control board 4100, the win determination unit 4100z starts when the game ball is received in either the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2102. Whether or not the above-mentioned starting condition is satisfied when the detection signal is output from the switch (corresponding to the illustrated starting SW) and the winning condition is satisfied by executing the winning lottery And the determination result is output to the transmission unit 4100w as winning information. The transmitter 4100w includes a transmission buffer 4100ws. The transmission unit 4100w stores the winning information output by the winning determination unit 4100z in the transmission buffer 4100ws, and performs serial (or parallel) communication with the peripheral control board 4140 when the above-described start condition is satisfied. To output.

On the other hand, the variation lottery unit 4100y selects a variation pattern corresponding to the established winning condition from among a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance upon the establishment of the above-described starting condition, and selects the variation pattern as the selection result. The corresponding fluctuation pattern command is output to the transmission unit 4100w. This transmission unit 4100w stores the variation pattern command output by the variation lottery unit 4100y in its transmission buffer, and when the above-mentioned start condition is satisfied, for example, the peripheral control board 4140 together with the winning information. Output according to serial or parallel communication method.

[16-3. Peripheral control board side]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control unit 4150 mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 has a reception buffer 4150pj for temporarily storing the command output from the main control board 4100 as a function of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In addition to the interpreter 4150q and the driver that determines the consistency of the command of the unit 4150p, the reception buffer 4150pj, and interprets the command, other than the image system (for example, at least one system of light output, sound output, and motor drive). And a selection and output unit 4150r for reading the data 4150t, a delay control unit 4150s, and a response control unit 4150u.

Regarding the sound output on the frame side, as the driver here, audio data such as music and sound effects is passed through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to drive the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. While the audio data transmission IC 4160c for outputting to the frame side can be mentioned, as for the light output on the frame side, a driver IC (not shown) for outputting effect control data to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 described above. Can be mentioned.

On the other hand, as the driver as described above, regarding the light output on the game board side, a driver IC (not shown) that outputs effect control data to the lamp drive board 4170 can be cited, while the game board is provided. Regarding the motor driving on the side, a driver IC (not shown) that outputs effect control data to the motor driving board 4180 described above can be mentioned.

Further, the peripheral control unit 4150 reads, as an image system, image control data 4150w (hereinafter referred to as “drawing list”) as an example of effect control data, generates a display command, and outputs the display command to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. , And a VDP 4160 that reads image data used for displaying an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the image data storage unit 4160z based on the generated display command. Here, in the present embodiment, the “image control data” indicates data (so-called “scenario data”) that defines what image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the schedule described above). It is different from the data of the image itself to be displayed. On the other hand, “image data” indicates sprite data used for displaying an image (so-called “sprite” or the like) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is data read from a liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b as a so-called character ROM. .

[16-4. Specific method in delay control unit]
[16-4-1. Delay control using pointers (pointer switching)]
FIG. 107 shows the ring buffer as an example more specifically, and is an example of how delay control using pointers is performed. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a specific method regarding the delay control unit 4150s and the delay control in FIG. In the present embodiment, a ring buffer is given as an example of the delay control unit 4150s, but the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, and may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO, and is different from the concept of a ring. It may be a buffer in which data is stored in a sequential method.

First, the ring buffer 4150sa includes a 0th buffer 4150sa0 to a 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas), and each buffer 4150sa0 and the like is provided with a start address as a start address of each storage area. Although the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (plurality of unit storage areas) can be specified as long as the start addresses of the respective buffers are specified, they do not have to have the same storage capacity, but the present embodiment In the form, it is desirable that the storage areas have the same storage capacity, for example. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each buffer (each unit storage area) will be described as an example of the storage area having the same storage capacity starting from the start address. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (plurality of unit storage areas) has, for example, a buffer as identification information from 0th to 7th. A number is assigned. In the present embodiment, each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 can be identified by a pointer (identifier) associated with each start address.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In the pointer update process, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer needs to be updated (step S1401). The pointers referred to here include a write pointer that points to the start address of the buffer where the effect control data should be written, and a fetch pointer that points to the start address of the buffer that has already been stored.

One of the conditions for updating the pointer in this way is that the frame has progressed, that is, the frame has been displayed and then the next frame has been displayed. In addition to the progress of the frame, the fact that a specific condition is satisfied may be included. As such a specific condition, for example, if the effect control data is set (stored) in any of the buffers, the pointer points even if the effect control data is not stored in any of the buffers. It is possible to prevent the buffers from moving one after another.

When the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the fetch pointer need to be updated, it updates the write pointer by +1 (step S1402), and updates the fetch pointer by +1 (step S1402). S1403). On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the fetch pointer do not need to be updated, this pointer update processing is ended, and the above-described regular processing is repeatedly executed.

In the present embodiment, as the condition for updating the pointer in this way, for example, the progress of frame display can be mentioned. Note that the pointer may be updated in accordance with another specific cycle, instead of in accordance with the progress of frame display.

The outline of the delay control using the pointer is as follows. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a tries to store certain effect control data in the ring buffer 4150sa, the peripheral buffer MPU 4150sa uses the write pointer to set the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 in the ring buffer 4150sa (a plurality of unit storage areas). A predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) of the above), the effect control data is stored in the specified predetermined buffer, and the write pointer corresponding to the start address of the stored predetermined buffer (hereinafter The “writing position” is also managed in association with the stored effect control data. After that, similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeats the storage in the ring buffer 4150sa for each subsequent effect control data group, and at this time, regarding each stored effect control data, a pointer (identifier that can be designated to distinguish each buffer from each other). ) Is used to manage the storage order in any one of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7.

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds a pointer corresponding to the start address of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 by +1 for each progress of the frame to update the start address for every predetermined period, and the updated start The state in which each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 can be designated once using the address is repeated.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a uses the pointer to store the stored effect control based on the pointer at the timing when the stored effect control data should be retrieved from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) serving as the writing position. The data is specified and is taken out from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter, also referred to as “take-in position”) and output to the driver.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the timing at which the performance control data stored in any one of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (corresponding to the writing position) should be fetched rather than the original timing. The stored effect control data is delayed by a predetermined delay amount due to a time difference until the stored effect control data is taken out, and the stored effect control data is taken out and output to the driver.

That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a shifts the position designation of the pointer for controlling the designation of the start address of each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 for each buffer, thereby performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation. The amount of delay has been delayed. As for the pointer updating method and updating timing, a pointer indicating a buffer for writing effect control data (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “writing position”) and a buffer for fetching stored effect control data (hereinafter, For example, the same condition may be applied to a pointer indicating a “capture position”).

[16-4-1-1. Delay control by changing the capture position]
As a method of setting such a predetermined delay amount, for example, a method of calculating and setting the fetch position by changing the fetch position and performing back calculation from the initial write position by a predetermined delay amount can be adopted. The details will be described below.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of write-in control processing of effect control data. It should be noted that this write fetch control process is executed, for example, triggered by a frame interrupt. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets predetermined effect control data in, for example, the buffer at the position indicated by the write pointer updated as described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “write initial position”) (step S1501).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines a predetermined delay amount (for example, +2 frames) as the delay amount (step S1502), subtracts the delay amount from the write initial position, fetches the calculation result, and fetches the initial position. Is set (step S1503).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the capture prohibition period as follows as an example of a method of delaying the fetch timing of the stored effect control data over the time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as a capture prohibition period (step S1504), and then confirms whether the capture prohibition period has elapsed (step S1505). It is assumed that the peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by -1 each time the frame progresses when the capture prohibition period starts and becomes 0, and the capture prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 takes out the stored effect control data from the buffer corresponding to the fetch initial position and outputs it to the driver (effect operation executing means).

Here, as an example, when the requested position (writing initial position) is the fifth buffer 4150sa5 and the delay amount is set to three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines the 5-3=second position as the initial loading position. The buffer (that is, the second buffer 4150sa2) is set. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets 3 frames as the capture prohibition period.

Note that the method of delaying the extraction timing of the stored effect control data over the time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount is not limited to setting the acquisition prohibited period as described above, and other methods May be adopted. Specifically, as such a method, for example, a method of comparing whether or not the capture position is the same as the writing position where the effect control data is set may be adopted.

[16-4-1-2. Delay control by changing the writing position]
On the other hand, as a method of setting the predetermined delay amount as described above, instead of the delay control by changing the fetching position described above, for example, a method of calculating and setting the writing position by back-calculating a predetermined delay amount from the fetching position Can also be adopted.

First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes, for example, a writing control control process for writing effect control data triggered by a frame interrupt. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds the delay amount to the buffer of the capture position for the new effect control data, and sets the write position from the calculation result.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as the capture prohibition period, and then confirms whether the capture prohibition period has elapsed. It is assumed that the peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by -1 each time the frame progresses when the capture prohibition period starts and becomes 0, and the capture prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 takes out the stored effect control data from the buffer corresponding to the take-in position and outputs it to the driver (effect operation executing means).

Here, as an example, when the capture position is set to the third buffer (that is, the third buffer 4150sa3) and the delay amount is set to three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the write position to the 3+3=6th buffer. It will be set as the buffer (that is, the sixth buffer 4150sa6).

As described above, during the capture prohibition period, regarding the buffer corresponding to the position specified by the difference between the capture position and the write position, the contents of the buffer are invalid (capture prohibition) over the frame display period corresponding to the difference. It is for doing.

As described above, according to the delay control by changing either the fetching position or the writing position, the effect control data output as described above can be stored in the ring buffer 4150sa in a manner such that the storage order can be specified. The buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) are stored for a predetermined period after being stored in a predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area), and thus correspond to the above-mentioned capture prohibited period. The output waiting time is constantly occurring.

[16-4-2. Delay control by moving data]
110 to 112 specifically show still another mode of the ring buffer as an example, and are examples of how delay control is performed by moving data, for example. 110 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of the delay control unit 4150s and the specific method regarding the delay control in FIG. 106, respectively. In the present embodiment, a ring buffer is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, and may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO, or a sequential method different from the concept of a ring. It may be a buffer that stores data.

As described above, the ring buffer 4150sa includes the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas). Although the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (plurality of unit storage areas) do not have to have the same storage capacity, in the present embodiment, for example, storage areas having the same storage capacity are used. There is. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (plurality of unit storage areas) has, for example, a buffer as identification information from 0th to 7th. A number is assigned.

The outline of delay control by data movement is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers certain effect control data to a predetermined buffer (for example, the 0th buffer 4150sa0) as a predetermined unit storage area of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7. After the storage, the effect control data stored in the 0th buffer 4150sa0 is stored in the next 0th buffer 4150sa0 as shown in FIG. It is moved to the first buffer 4150sa1. Further, when the frame interrupt is applied next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a moves the effect control data stored in the first buffer 4150sa1 to the next second buffer 4150sa2. Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeats as shown in FIG. 112 each time a frame interrupt is further applied, moves the effect control data from the buffer in which the effect control data is stored to the next buffer, and although not shown. Finally, the effect control data is read from the seventh buffer 4150sa7.

In this way, when it is attempted to store certain effect control data in the ring buffer 4150sa, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects a predetermined one of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) in the ring buffer 4150sa. A buffer (predetermined unit storage area) is designated, the effect control data is stored in the designated predetermined buffer, and the stored writing position is managed in association with the stored effect control data. .

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the stored effect control data at the timing when the stored effect control data should be retrieved from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) serving as the writing position. It is configured to take out from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter also referred to as “take-in position”) and output to the driver.

Note that the ring buffer 4150sa described above may have a form in which the number of a plurality of buffers is changed according to the delay amount. Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the ring buffer 4150sa, the method of designating the write position and the fetch position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the size of each buffer 4150sa0 and the like is fixed. The writing position and the fetching position may be always the same. By doing so, it is not necessary to manage the import position and the write position. As a specific example, for example, when the delay amount is always 4 frames, the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 4th buffer 4150sa4 are secured as buffers, while the 0th buffer 4150sa0 is fixed as the writing position. In addition, the fourth buffer sa4 can be fixed at the fetch position.

Although the buffer size is secured for the maximum delay, one of the write position and the capture position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 may be fixed in order to adjust the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is 4 frames, the writing position is the 0th buffer sa0 and the fetching position is the 5th buffer sa5. In this case, the sixth buffer sa6 and the seventh buffer sa7 are unused areas. On the other hand, when fixing the capture position to the seventh buffer sa7, the write position may be changed according to the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is 5 frames, the writing position is not the 0th buffer sa0 but the second buffer sa2. Therefore, the 0th buffer sa0 and the 1st buffer sa1 are unused areas. The adjustment of the delay amount may be switched depending on the satisfaction of any of the conditions such as the game state and the variation mode.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the timing at which the effect control data stored in any one of the plurality of buffers (corresponding to the writing position) should be taken out, rather than the original timing. Is delayed by a predetermined delay amount due to the time difference until the output is taken out, and the stored effect control data is taken out and output to the driver. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a certain amount of effect control data to operate a certain effect device, and then outputs a certain amount of delay until the effect control data is actually input to the effect device. Is assumed to have occurred.

[16-5. Configuration example mainly related to response control]
Next, a configuration example regarding response control will be described with reference to FIG. The response control unit 4150u (response control means) described above satisfies the predetermined condition even before delaying the original timing described above by a predetermined delay amount (corresponding to the above-mentioned “capture prohibition period”). As a result, the delay control unit 4150s (information output control means) has already stored the data from any one of the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) from the predetermined buffer (a predetermined unit storage area). The effect control data of is taken out and output to the driver 4150v (effect operation executing means). Then, the rendering device 4190 (rendering means) immediately starts execution of the rendering operation based on the rendering control data output to the driver 4150v. As an example of the effect device 4190, which will be described in detail later, for example, any one of a speaker (sound output unit), a lamp (light output unit), and an accessory motor (an accessory drive unit), or a combination of any of these is given. be able to. In the present embodiment, as one example, the rendering device 4190 (rendering means) includes a drive unit (role motor) that is driven based on the production control data, and a movable accessory that operates in a predetermined manner by this drive unit. To do.

By the way, in the present embodiment, a response dedicated buffer may be provided separately from the delay control unit 4150s (hereinafter also referred to as “delay buffer”) including the plurality of buffers 4150sa1 to 4150sa7. As a situation in which such a response-dedicated buffer is used, for example, a case where responsiveness is required for performance is assumed. As the response buffer, instead of preparing the plurality of buffers 4150sa1 to 4150sa7 like the delay buffer described above, for example, a single buffer configuration (not shown) is used. The response buffer waits for the writing of the effect control data into the single buffer to be completed, and the effect control data as the content already stored in the buffer is taken out by the driver 4150v.

Further, such a response-dedicated buffer may be composed of, for example, a plurality of buffers instead of a single buffer as described above. By using a plurality of buffers in this way, it is possible to write different effect control data to the next buffer even while fetching effect control data from a certain buffer. It is possible to perform the processing and the capturing processing at the same time. However, when a plurality of buffers are used, the time from writing to fetching is delayed, so it is necessary to set the number of buffers to the extent that responsiveness is not impaired. For example, if a double buffer configuration is used so that writing and loading can be performed at the same time, a delay of one buffer will occur at the first writing, but no delay will occur from the next loading. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (or avoid) the responsiveness as much as possible. Further, as the buffer, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a configuration may be such that a dedicated buffer is provided for each effect device.

The effect control data set in the response dedicated buffer may be switched according to the state of the game, or may be fixed for each effect device. For example, when the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is operated as an effect button and the user wants to output a sound effect at the same time as the operation, only effect control data of the sound effect device (for example, a speaker) accompanying the operation of the button unit 220C. May be fixed in the response-dedicated buffer. In this case, depending on the type of sound, the delay buffer or the response-dedicated buffer is managed.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned “predetermined condition”, it is possible to cite that, for example, an operation signal is output according to the operation mode of the button unit 220C (operation means) that can be operated from the outside. The predetermined condition is not limited to the button unit 220C being operated, but may be triggered by the occurrence of another predetermined event. For example, when a player reaches a higher expectation level for a big hit than a normal reach (equivalent to a so-called "special reach"), or when a big hit is performed, a specific effect is started. The case may be taken as an opportunity.

[16-6. Specific example of response control]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a first example of the response to the operation of the player under the assumption that the delay control is performed, and FIG. 114 is a diagram of the response to the operation of the player under the assumption that the delay control is performed. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example. In addition, FIG. 113(A) and FIG. 114(A) respectively show an example of an internal effect sequence, and FIG. 113(B) and FIG. 114(B) are respectively effect sequences for operation triggers. Represents an example.

[16-6-1. First example of response]
In the first example relating to the response, for example, a production sequence serving as a main axis and a production sequence of an operation trigger are provided in duplicate, and the production sequence of the operation trigger responds immediately with a delay amount of 0. In the first example related to this response, the set of production control data necessary for production is divided and prepared in advance, so that the design load such as capacity limitation and production control data is slightly increased in advance, but the player directly You will be able to get a good feeling of operation.

[16-6-1-1. Internal production sequence management]
In the first example shown in FIG. 113(A), the delay control is performed on the effect reproduction mechanism side (corresponding to the delay control unit 4150s described above). If such a system is adopted, the effect of delay control is performed on the side of the effect reproduction mechanism, so that the effect of the effect reproduction data itself can be reduced, but the load of the production work of the effect control data can be reduced.

First, although common to the following description, the peripheral control ROM 4160b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab stores a drawing request list having the following configuration. That is, in such a drawing request list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, and the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame. Therefore, the drawing list 4 corresponds to the fourth frame, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a generates the following display list. That is, in the display list, for example, the first frame corresponds to the drawing list 1, the second frame corresponds to the drawing list 2, the third frame corresponds to the drawing list 3, and the fourth frame corresponds to the fourth frame. The drawing list 4 corresponds to the frame, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a interprets the display list, performs cache management, and reconstructs the display list, while performing delay control using the delay control unit 4150s. For example, as shown in FIG. A delay amount for the frame is generated. In this example, instead of the peripheral control MPU 4150a executing such processing, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a may execute such processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

The sound source built-in VDP 4160a operates under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and is delayed by 4 frames by the delay control unit 4150s, that is, is shifted backward by four frame interrupts in time, and drawing data is stored in a frame buffer (not shown). The writing process is executed by writing.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, based on the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list 1 which is already stored in the frame buffer in the next frame interrupt which is delayed by 4 frames (that is, delayed by 5 frames). The image is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image with a delay amount of 5 frames from the original timing. When the next frame interrupt is applied, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image based on the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list 2 delayed by 6 frames. Further, each time a frame interrupt is applied thereafter, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also stored in the frame buffer and delayed by 5 frames as a predetermined delay amount, and then, in the drawing list. Video groups based on the corresponding drawing data are displayed one after another.

The selection & output unit 4150r switches between the response side (response control unit 4150s) and the delay side (delay control unit 4150s) as the output destination of the extracted data 4150t. In this case, the selection & output unit 4150r needs to manage the fetched data 4150t to switch between output to the response side and output to the delay side. As an example of the management method, for example, it may be possible to switch depending on the situation of the effect, or the data itself to be captured may be preset with information indicating which to output. The switching may be made on the delay side.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140 is divided into an image system and a system other than the image system, and the image system includes a response side (response control unit 4150s) and a delay side (delay control unit 4150s). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image system may also be divided into a response side and a delay side.

[16-6-1-2. Operation sequence for operation opportunity]
In this effect-triggering effect production sequence, as shown in FIG. 113(B), all the effect control data required in the operation-triggering sequence is read in advance and an immediate response is made. According to the effect sequence for this operation trigger, the load at the time of executing the effect control increases, but the delay amount becomes 0, so that the response can be improved.

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a handles, as the effect control data, a set of effect control data for the effect devices that should be handled by the operation of the player, and, for example, a screen (a liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like), a lamp, a sound output. The effect control data for driving the motor of the part (speaker) and the accessory is used.

Although the peripheral control MPU 4150a assumes that a predetermined delay amount has occurred with respect to the screen display relating to the liquid crystal display device 1900 as described above, that a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, as described above, the player pushes a button. Upon operation of the unit 220C, the delay amount is immediately set to 0 as shown in FIG. 113(B), and the effect control data already stored in the response dedicated buffer (not shown) described later is immediately sent from the response control unit 4150u. Alternatively, the response control unit 4150u is caused to take out the stored effect control data from any one of predetermined buffers (predetermined unit storage areas) of the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas), The driver 4150v (production operation executing means) is caused to output. Then, the rendering device 4190 (rendering means) relating to the screen, the lamp, the sound, and the accessory immediately performs the rendering operation based on the rendering control data output to the driver 4150v without waiting for the delay amount.

[16-6-2. Second example of response]
In the second example relating to the response, in response to the operation of the button unit 220C (operating means) by the player as a trigger, all the directing devices such as the speaker, the lamp, and the accessory motor are made to respond immediately in synchronization with each other. Immediately responding to only some of the effect devices according to the operation, the player is made to feel the responsiveness as an illusion.

That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the effect operation of the plurality of effect devices such as the above-described speaker, in the normal time, the effect control is performed so that the effect control is performed in synchronization with the effect devices in synchronization with the effect devices. Although the data is taken out, the effect control data is generated at a different timing from some other effect devices for some effect devices out of the plurality of effect devices when a predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied. By taking out, the part of the effect devices starts effect control at a timing different from that of the other effect devices (response control means). Therefore, only the rendering device that requires a response has an earlier output timing, and the rendering device that does not require a response operates to match the timing of the image. For this purpose, for example, the response control means sets a different timing before the passage of the data processing period for a predetermined display surface area described later. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the response control means, before the elapse of the period required for the data processing for the predetermined display surface, which will be described later, outputs the information storage means for some of the plurality of presentation means from the information storage means. Outputs performance control data.

First, comparing the above-described first example and second example, first, the above-described first example shown in FIG. 113 is limited to an image (corresponding to the screen shown in the figure) and pre-read. It can be understood as a thing. In the case of the first example, it is necessary to prepare a drawing list and the like in advance when operating and when not operating. It should be noted that in FIG. 113, the image (corresponding to the screen shown in the figure) is specialized, but there is no need to specialize in the image in this way. On the other hand, it can be said that the second example shown in FIG. 114 includes (sound, lamp, accessory) other than such an image.

Note that, in the present embodiment, as described above, the response control unit 4150u (the response-dedicated buffer thereof) does not necessarily have to include a plurality of buffers (a plurality of unit storage areas), and is configured by a single buffer. Is also good. ...The fonts are different.

In the second example, it can be said that the method is capable of reducing the work load in the points described below, as compared with an example (the first example described above) in which the work load when producing the effect control data is large. First, in the second example, similarly to the first example, it is a little difficult to control the image without any delay, so that it is possible to include a part of the image for easier operation. However, some or all of the rendering devices other than the video are made to respond immediately in accordance with the operation of the player. For example, the image can be delayed from the moment the button unit 220C (operating means) is operated, but the sound is immediately output and the lamp immediately outputs light. As a result, it is possible to exert an effect as if the response of the entire production is improved as an illusion. On the other hand, as for the screen (video), it is possible to express the whole flash or a momentary enlargement, so that it is possible to achieve the effect as if the response is improved while not increasing the mounting difficulty.

(1) Internal production sequence management In the internal production sequence in the second example shown in FIG. 114(A), the internal production sequence in the above-described first example (see FIG. 113(A)) is used. Similarly, although the video delay amount is 5 frames and the effect reproduction mechanism is slightly complicated, the work load when producing effect control data is small. That is, since the delay can be freely performed only by the driver (buffer) management shown in FIG. 114A, it is not necessary to consider the delay amount for each effect. Therefore, according to the second example shown in FIG. 114A, it is possible to reduce the work load when creating the effect control data.

(2) Effect Sequence for Operation Trigger In the case of the second example shown in FIG. 114(B), for example, only the effect device that does not require advance preparation is made to immediately respond to the operation. In the case of the second example, the delay amount is 0 frame, the response is good, and the work load in producing the production control data is small.

According to the above-described embodiment, when controlling the rendering operation of each of the rendering devices, the rendering control is performed at the same time so that the rendering control is performed in synchronization with the rendering devices 4190 at the same time in the normal time. It is assumed that the data will be retrieved. Under such a premise, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a establishes a predetermined condition, some rendering devices of the plurality of rendering devices 4190 have different timings from other rendering devices. By taking out the effect control data, the part of the effect devices that have received the effect control data is caused to start effect control at a timing different from that of the other effect devices. In this way, the player who was originally accustomed to the performance being delayed by the predetermined delay amount suddenly changes the performance of the performance device when the predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied. You will feel that the response has improved and you will be surprised at the sudden movement of the production device, and the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

[16-7. Frame delay (software side processing)]
By the way, in a general conventional pachinko machine, in addition to a game control board for controlling a game operation, a production control board for controlling a production operation is mounted (see the above-mentioned first reference document). In addition to the so-called character ROM in which material image data used for displaying an image is stored in advance, the effect control board also includes the previously described material image RAM ( temporary storage for temporarily storing material image data in advance). Some include not only a storage unit but also a VDP as a graphic chip. In order to cover the low read speed of the character ROM, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the material image RAM ( temporary storage unit) having a high read speed, but try to realize various displays as in recent years. If so, a large amount of material image data is required, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the character ROM and also increase the storage capacity of the temporary storage unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the storage capacity of the temporary storage unit, the progress of the game is controlled for the purpose of reducing visual discomfort even when a storage unit having a low reading speed is adopted as the character ROM. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with a main control board 4100 (game control means) and a peripheral control board 4140 (production control means) that controls a production device that displays an image in response to an instruction from the main control board 4100. The peripheral control board 4140 temporarily stores a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (constant storage means) in which material image data forming a video frame (display surface) is stored in advance, and a material image data group in frame units. The material image RAM (temporary storage means) described above is provided, and the configuration described below is adopted. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is given as an example of a ROM that is slow to read stored data.

[16-7-1. Premise of frame delay control]
First, the drawing request for each frame includes the number of material image groups to be simultaneously drawn, the coordinates on those frames, and information regarding their display mode. As the drawing request list of each frame, for example, for each frame to be displayed, an identification number (for example, corresponding to the sprite number described above) indicating a necessary material image to be included in the frame, its drawing mode, and the material image Coordinate information (4 vertex management, XY coordinates, rotation magnification, etc.) is included.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing request list stored in the peripheral control ROM 4160b or the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab and corresponding to each frame regarding a drawing request of each frame when a certain scene is reproduced. It should be noted that the drawing request list is interpreted for each frame and the drawing requests are actually output in order.

The peripheral control ROM 4160b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab stores a drawing request list (first effect control data) having the following configuration. That is, in each drawing request list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, and the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame. The drawing list 4 corresponds to four frames, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame. Note that, here, a group of drawing lists is called a "drawing request list".

[16-7-2. When using a character ROM with high read speed]
FIG. 116A to FIG. 116D are diagrams showing an example of a drawing process by a general frame buffer type graphic chip as a comparison target of the present embodiment. In these FIGS. 116A to 116D, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (corresponding to the CPU shown) and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (corresponding to the VDP shown) are used at each processing timing of each frame. The drawing request list (and the processed drawing request list, etc.) are shown aligned in the vertical direction. Here, since FIG. 116A has the same content as that of FIG. 115 described above, the description thereof is omitted. The wording "drawing list" shown in FIGS. 116C and 116D indicates not the drawing list itself but the data (image data) generated based on the drawing list.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a selects a drawing request list (first effect control data) for controlling the display of images at the timing of starting the drawing process of each frame (effect control data selecting means), and the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control. The drawing list 1 or the like is acquired as the corresponding drawing list from the built-in RAM 4150ab, the contents thereof are interpreted, and as shown in FIG. 116B, the interpreted drawing list group (drawing list 1′, drawing list 2′). ,... A display list composed of a drawing list 6', etc. is created. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the necessary material image data read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b or the material image RAM in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the material image RAM of the double buffer according to the created display list. While storing in one of the buffers, a necessary stored material image is read from the other buffer of the material image RAM having the double buffer configuration. After that, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeats the reverse process. As a result, the cycle is delayed by one frame as shown in FIG. 116(C). The material image RAM is an example of a temporary storage unit used like a cache, and is based on a specific drawing list (first effect control data) corresponding to the above-described drawing list, and the material image data is frame-based. It is a kind of memory for temporarily storing the group instead of newly reading it from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b.

Here, at first glance, it seems that the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source cannot directly operate the material image data group in the cache area of the material image RAM, but in the present embodiment, it is between the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source and the material image RAM. Although not shown, for example, a controller and a ROM are provided, and this controller can operate the material image data group in the cache area of the material image RAM under the control of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The cache controller and the ROM may be built in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

In the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140, the material image data group read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b or the material image RAM can be stored as drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (production device). A frame buffer (display surface image storage means) is provided. This frame buffer employs a so-called double buffer configuration, and while drawing data is being written in one frame buffer (not shown), the liquid crystal and sound are generated based on the drawing data already written in the other frame buffer (not shown). An image is displayed on the control ROM 4160b. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data using the read necessary material image data and stores the drawing data in one frame buffer, and based on the drawing data already stored in the other frame buffer, FIG. ), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image composed of each frame while executing the drawing process with a delay of one frame period (corresponding to “reflect on screen” shown in FIG. 116D). . That is, in the drawing processing by the general frame buffer type graphic chip, there is a delay of two frames from the drawing request to the actual reflection as a video.

[16-7-3. When using a character ROM with a low read speed]
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of the drawing process according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 117, the drawing request list (and the processed drawing request) used at the processing timing of each frame by the peripheral control MPU 4150a (corresponding to the illustrated CPU) and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (corresponding to the illustrated VDP) shown on the left side. Lists, etc.) are aligned vertically. Note that FIG. 117A has the same content as FIG. 115 described above and FIG. 117B has the same content as FIG. 116B; therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. At the same time, the description of the same processing as above is omitted.

First, the outline will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a interprets the display list, performs cache management, and further reconstructs the list. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first, from the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, draws each corresponding drawing list (first effect control data shown in FIG. 117A) at the drawing processing timing of each frame. ), the drawing list 1 is acquired and interpreted, and as shown in FIG. 117B, a display list including the interpreted drawing list group is created. Here, the drawing list 1 will be mainly described as an example of the display list.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a provides the sound source built-in VDP 4160a with a necessary material image data group from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b or a specific storage area of the material image RAM according to the interpreted result according to the drawing list of the created display list. The stored material image data is stored in one of the double-buffer-structured material image RAMs and is read from the other buffer of the double-buffer-structured material image RAM. As a result, the cycle is delayed by one frame as shown in FIG. 117(C).

By the way, the material image data group expanded in the material image RAM as described above is deleted from the cache area of the material image RAM or left in the cache area in accordance with the usage history by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. (Corresponding to "cache management" above). In this cache management, for example, when trying to expand a certain material image data, it is judged whether or not this material image data is already expanded in the cache area, and if it is already expanded in the cache area, The material image data is controlled so as not to be newly expanded, while the material image data is newly expanded in a predetermined arrangement mode (hereinafter also referred to as “rearrangement”) when the material image data has not been expanded yet. Control (corresponding to "cache management" above). Furthermore, in this cache management, when the usage frequency of the material image data that has been expanded in the cache area is lower than a predetermined threshold value, the material image data is automatically deleted from the cache area.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a re-creates a new drawing list (second effect control data) for a frame based on the arrangement mode of the drawing list 1 (first effect control data) and the rearranged material image data. Build (reconstruction means). The reason for reconstructing in this way is that the storage position (readout position) of the necessary material image data group should be changed because the necessary material image data group is rearranged in the material image RAM (cache RAM). This is because the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the read position (address) of these necessary material image data groups even after the change. Note that such reconstruction may be performed by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a instead of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

On the other hand, such reconstruction causes a time difference between the time when the necessary material image data group is stored in the material image RAM and the time when the necessary material image data group is read. Due to this time difference, the drawing process is delayed by a predetermined number of frames (a predetermined delay amount). Will occur. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117(C), due to the existence of a frame delay mechanism that performs display list interpretation, cache management, and list reconstruction, a delay amount of, for example, three frame periods is generated. Become.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a grasps the storage position of the necessary material image data group in the cache area of the material image RAM on the basis of the new drawing list 1'and the like, and stores the necessary material image data group in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Is stored in one of the frame buffers of the double buffer configuration to execute the drawing process (see the timing of the fifth frame in FIG. 117D), while the drawing data of the other frame buffer for which the drawing process has already been completed. Based on this, an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (corresponding to “screen reflection” shown in FIG. 117E). As a result, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a delay of one frame period occurs with respect to each drawing list 1". After that, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to perform the opposite process. 117E, in the present embodiment, the frame corresponding to the drawing list 1 is displayed with a delay of 5 frame cycles as an example. When the double buffer structure is adopted as described above, the drawing process can be efficiently executed without waste in each frame cycle as compared with the case where the single buffer structure is adopted. By repeating this, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to repeatedly display an image corresponding to each drawing list 1 shown in FIG.

Here, when a memory having a low read speed (a liquid crystal and a sound control ROM 4160b is exemplified in the present embodiment) is adopted as the character ROM (always storing means) to display each frame, it is apparent that the character ROM is necessary. It takes an extra time to completely read out such material image data, which may affect the drawing process of each frame. However, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (reconstruction unit) performs the predetermined period of time for each necessary material image data (the predetermined display surface material image data) that has been loaded into the material image RAM ( temporary storage unit). By executing the processing in this manner, a predetermined delay amount is generated until the reading of each required material image data from the material image RAM is started. Therefore, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) can secure a sufficient time required for the drawing processing of each frame when trying to display each frame. Therefore, a memory with a low reading speed is used as the character ROM. Even in such a case, the drawing process can be surely completed for each frame, as in the case of using a memory having a high reading speed. Therefore, even if a memory having a low reading speed is adopted as the character ROM, the image formed by each frame can be prevented from being disturbed without a device such as increasing the storage capacity of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab. The discomfort above can be reduced.

3

[17. How to eliminate touch LCD abnormality]
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to make the player's interest less likely to run out, there are machines equipped with various devices (see the above-mentioned first reference). Such a device is generally subjected to initial processing when the power is turned on, and then continuously driven in a prescribed operation mode. On the other hand, in a game hall (hall), a large number of game balls are transported, so not only is noise constantly generated, but also in the game machine, not only the flow of the game balls but also the circuit and power supply generate noise. It may occur. At first glance, depending on the type of the device described above, it is possible that the device may not operate in the specified operation mode due to the influence of such noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production control program is under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation means) is operated based on an operation signal from a switch (not shown) in a prescribed operation mode (for example, a mode in which it is pressed five times). ), the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (one device) is partially reset without resetting. The side liquid crystal display device 246 (the other device) is reset. In addition, in addition, the effect control program may reset the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 when the specified condition described later is satisfied and the reset condition described above is satisfied. .

As a first example of such a predetermined condition, it can be mentioned that the main body frame 4 or the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. First, as described above, the main control program (game control means), under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the door frame opening command (specific frame opening command) is triggered when the door frame 5 is opened. While outputting the state command), the main frame opening command (specific frame open state command) is output when the main frame 4 is opened.

When the production control program receives a command (command) output by the main control program under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), this command is a door frame opening command or a main frame opening command. Determine if there is. When the command is the door opening command or the main body frame opening command, the production control program assumes that the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied.

It is desirable that such a predetermined condition is basically a condition that can be satisfied when a special operation permitted as a privilege to the store clerk at the game hall (hall) is basically performed. Such a predetermined condition is not limited to the opening of the door frame 5 or the main body frame 4 as described above, but may be other situations.

In the present embodiment, as such a predetermined condition, it is more preferable that the door frame 5 is opened rather than the body frame 4 being opened. The reason is that, in the case where some trouble occurs, the clerk of the game hall generally accepts the game ball into the general winning opening 2104 etc. as an apology for the interruption of the game after the response to the trouble is completed. Since a few prize ball services are often provided to the player, one operation of opening the door frame 5 can both fulfill the predetermined condition and prepare for the prize ball service. is there.

More specifically, as described above, in the effect control program, such a prescribed condition is satisfied, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operating means) performs a prescribed operation based on the operation signal described above. It is determined whether or not the manual reset condition is satisfied by being operated in the mode (pressed five times) (manual reset condition determination means). It should be noted that the manual reset condition is not only that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the specified operation mode in this way, but also that another operation that is mainly known only to the clerk at the game hall is performed. good. The effect control program described above, triggered by the establishment of such a manual reset condition, maintains the control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means), and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 ( Second display means) is reset (display initialization means). That is, the production control program controls the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source by the peripheral control MPU 4150a and controls the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as usual using the channel CH1 thereof, while simultaneously controlling the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21). ) To output a reset signal to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246.

In this way, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 that has received this reset signal executes the prescribed reset processing and restarts, and then operates in the prescribed operating mode. As a result, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246, which has come to stop operating in the prescribed operating mode as it should be, does not cause any anxiety to the player by a simple operation, especially even while the probability variation function is operating. Aspects can be restored to operate in the prescribed manner of operation.

By the way, the production control program sets a reset allowable period as a period for allowing the reset signal from the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21) of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source to be output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It may be set. As such a reset allowable period, a period in which the starting information storage information is not stored in the starting storage information storage area for any of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (a period in which the so-called holding number is 0) Can be mentioned. Specifically, the effect control program, starting memory information storage corresponding to the variable display waiting of the special symbol based on at least one command of the special symbol 1 storage command and the special symbol 2 storage command received from the main control board 4100. If it is present, the reset allowable period is set if the start memory information storage waiting for variable display does not exist, while it is set if the start memory information storage waiting for variable display exists. The reset allowable period is not set and the output of the reset signal described above is restricted. In this way, when the so-called holding number is not 0, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 does not receive the reset signal and performs the prescribed reset process. Therefore, when the reset process is performed, Do not give the player watching the plate-side liquid crystal display device 246 the fear that the number of holdings has become unclear or that the starting memory information (starting holding) itself has disappeared. Can be

By the way, the production control program, for example, resets the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 instead of triggering the establishment of the automatic reset condition as a trigger. After the condition is satisfied, the start condition may be satisfied (variable display of the special symbol is started), so that it may be executed at the timing of variably displaying the decorative symbol. By doing this, even when the reset process is executed, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 that starts the variable display of the decorative pattern does not display anything for a moment, so that there is an expectation for the jackpot (hereinafter, By giving a recognition that "blackout effect" has been executed, and making it feel as if it is part of the effect, the player's interest is reduced when the reset process is executed. Can be hardened.

In addition, in recent game machines, there are some game machines equipped with various detection devices such as sensors in order to make the player's interest less exhaustive (see the above-mentioned first reference). .. Such a detection device is generally subjected to sensitivity adjustment as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then operates at the sensitivity. However, while a large number of game balls are being transported not only in the game machine but also in the game arcade, the player himself/herself also generates static electricity, and thus is constantly in a state where noise is easily generated. At first glance, depending on the type of the above-mentioned detection device, it seems that the detection sensitivity may be unsuitable due to the influence of such noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140, the elapsed time that the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is the prescribed contact state described later, the prescribed time has elapsed. When the time is exceeded, the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is automatically reset partially without resetting the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means).

Specifically, the production control program causes a counter (contact duration measuring unit) or an RTC control unit 4160 (contact duration measuring unit) (not shown) to contact the contact surface detected by the touch panel 246 (contact input unit). The elapsed time during which the state is a prescribed contact state (for example, "a continuous contact state of 1 second or more" is mentioned) is measured. The production control program determines whether or not the elapsed time measured in such a continuous contact state exceeds, for example, 1 second (specified elapsed time) (hereinafter, whether or not the “automatic reset condition” is satisfied). ) Is determined (automatic reset condition determination means). Note that the automatic reset condition is not only that the contact state of the contact surface is in the specified contact state for a predetermined elapsed time in this way, and other events continue for a predetermined elapsed time. It may be what you are doing. Furthermore, the production control program is triggered by the establishment of this automatic reset condition, while maintaining control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means), and at the same time, the touch panel module 246a (contact type input). The touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is reset by resetting the control means (contact initialization means).

By doing this, the touch panel 246 is restarted, so that the touch panel 246 (detection device) that has temporarily stopped operating with appropriate detection sensitivity is automatically activated again with appropriate detection sensitivity. be able to.

By the way, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect tables are provided, and the plurality of effect tables are the first effect tables having a relatively high probability of performing the effect operation using the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. , And a second effect table having a relatively low probability of performing an effect operation using the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. In this way, the production control program uses the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 from among the plurality of production tables for the special symbol, for example, five times (a prescribed number of fluctuation display times) from the time when the manual reset condition is established. The probability of selecting the first effect table having a relatively high probability of executing the effect operation is set low. In this way, after the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is reset, it is difficult to perform the effect operation using the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 for the above-described predetermined variable display times (5 times). As a result, the player is less likely to notice the behavior of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 immediately after the reset, and the interest is less likely to deteriorate even when the player is reset.

[Calibration timing (power on/off)]
By the way, in general pachinko game machines in recent years, various detecting devices such as a sensor are mounted in order to provide a gaming property in which the player's interest is not exhausted (see the above-mentioned first reference). As such a detection device, generally, the sensitivity is adjusted as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then many of them operate at the sensitivity. However, in a recent general pachinko gaming machine, even if the sensitivity is adjusted in the initial processing as described above, at first glance, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate depending on the subsequent gaming environment. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production control program controls the power supply opening/closing control unit 4140c (power supply control means) at a predetermined timing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to momentarily stop or temporarily stop the power supply. Then, immediately after that, the power supply is restarted, so that the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is touched at the predetermined timing by the above-described power-on touch sensitivity adjusting function built in the touch panel module 246a. Sensitivity is adjusted (adjustment timing control means).

As a specific method of adjusting the touch sensitivity, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a to start the supply of power to the touch panel controller 481 by the power supply control unit, and as described above, the touch panel 246. The contact determination threshold of the control register 481a, which stores the contact determination threshold as the electrostatic capacity when the contact surface is in the non-contact state, is forcibly forced to the predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the “initial contact determination threshold value”).

By doing so, for example, without adding a new function for adjusting the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 during a game, the touch sensitivity adjustment function at power-on which is built in the touch panel module 246a in advance is diverted. Then, the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 can be adjusted at a desired timing. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contact sensitivity of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 during the game, it is possible to minimize the chance that the player feels an operational discomfort when operating the contact surface of the touch panel 246. .

Further, in the present embodiment, the production control program controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a to control the power supply opening/closing control unit 4140c (power supply control means) to momentarily stop or temporarily stop the power supply for a predetermined period. Output of a production command (command) that causes the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 (second display means) to execute a display operation in a mode of urging contact with the operation surface of the contact type input means. Are regulated (contact reminder control means).

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the chances that the player touches the contact surface of the touch panel 246 for the above specified period, so that the player feels an uncomfortable feeling during operation while adjusting the contact sensitivity. It can be made difficult.

[18. Game specification browsing function]
[18-1. Booklet information display]
By the way, in general, a player can read through a gaming machine related information magazine in advance for a gaming machine that he or she is accustomed to on the other hand. As a source of information for understanding the specifications of the machine, it is possible to refer to a booklet prepared by the game machine manufacturer and prepared at the game hall before the game starts. In recent years, game machines are characterized by their game characteristics (see the above-mentioned first reference), and by referring to such a booklet, the player can easily outline the game specifications of the model. (Hereinafter, such a current situation is also referred to as “predetermined background”). It is hard to say that the related information magazines as described above are definitely available information sources because the players have to go to the stores one by one to purchase them. On the other hand, since the number of copies of the booklet provided by the gaming machine manufacturer is limited, it cannot always be obtained by all the desired players.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, in the configuration of the storage area of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b (production control storage means) in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, as shown in FIG. Model information as a specified storage area fixedly secured in a space from a specified start address to a specified end address separately from the effect data area 4160ba in which effect data used for control is stored in advance. A data area 4160bb is formed.

In the model information data area 4160bb, a plurality of page unit model information data for displaying the model information of the model (hereinafter referred to as "booklet information") on a plurality of pages as an example of information about the game content is defined as above. Are stored beforehand in order from the specified start address in the storage area. In the present embodiment, all the page-based model information data are collectively referred to as “model information data”. The blank area 4160bc represents the remaining space of the storage area of the effect data area 4160ba that is not filled with the data when the data is stored.

In the present embodiment, such model information data is, for example, data for displaying booklet information including a description of at least one of a game method and a game specification regarding a pachinko machine of a certain specific model, divided into a plurality of pages. Can be mentioned. Here, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment as the model A is illustrated, while the pachinko gaming machine including another gaming board is illustrated as the model B. In any of these models, the model information data unique to each model is stored in a space extending from the top address (corresponding to the above-mentioned "start address") of the model information data area 4160ba to the specified end address.

In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, for example, in the state where the game is not continued, the production control program is triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact state detection means), and the liquid crystal and sound control unit. In the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of 4160, the specified start address and the specified end address of the storage areas of the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b are fixedly specified, and the specified amount of data is uniformly read from the model information data area 4160bb. (Model information data control means). The read data includes the model information data as the model information data described above. In addition, the reason why the data of the specified capacity is read out in this manner is that the method can be similarly applied to other models without modifying the program code.

The effect control program causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate specific page drawing data as drawing data corresponding to a specific page of a plurality of pages from the model information data read as described above, and is not shown. Store in the frame buffer. When the drawing data is stored in the frame buffer, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a further synchronizes with the V blank signal output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to display the specific page drawing data of the frame buffer on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. Output to the device 244.

Then, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 executes the drawing process based on the input drawing data in synchronization with the V blank signal received from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and displays the corresponding frame in the display area. By doing so, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a first displays an introduction page representing a model theme such as "FIRE DYNAMITE KING" as a specific page in the booklet information as information about game contents, as shown in FIG. 119. Yes (specific page drawing control means).

In this way, even if a player encounters a strange game machine at a game hall where a pamphlet or the like that explains the game method or game specifications is not installed at all or a sufficient number of game machines are not installed. , Instead of referring to the booklet about the unknown gaming machine, you can browse the page that outlines the overall gaming flow, so you can fully understand the gaming specifications without getting lost in the gaming method. You can enjoy the game.

On the other hand, as a gaming machine development company, since it is easy for the gaming machine developer to accurately understand the gaming method and the gaming specifications intended by the gaming machine developer, the gaming specifications are somewhat complicated or the gaming method is rare. Also, it is possible to easily entertain the player with the playability according to the game specification along the intended game method.

On the other hand, as a game hall, it is not necessary to newly prepare a corresponding booklet etc. for each model of the game machine replaced in the island facility where the frequency of game machine replacement tends to be high every day. Not only can the maintenance work be reduced, but the reduced amount of game staff can engage in other work.

By the way, the model information data described above is composed of a set of page unit model information data 4610za to 4610zz corresponding to a plurality of pages, as shown in FIG. 67(A), and each page unit model information data. 4610za to 4610zz are provided with prescribed page break information 4160z arranged at the beginning from a prescribed start address for each page. As shown in FIG. 67(B), the page break information 4160z includes, for example, 2-byte performance type information 4160za, previous page start address 4160zb, and next page start address 4160zc from the start address of each page. .. The effect type information is information about the type of effect content explained on each corresponding page, and represents information such as "reach effect", for example. The previous page start address 4160zb represents the position of the storage area in which the page unit model information data used for displaying the previous page is stored when the previous page of the currently displayed pages among the plurality of pages exists. Represents the start address of. On the other hand, the next page start address 4160zc indicates the position of the storage area in which the page unit model information data used for displaying the next page is stored when the next page of the currently displayed page among the plurality of pages exists. It represents the specified start address.

In such a configuration, the production control program, the model information data corresponding to each model (and the plurality of page unit model information that constitutes it) over the specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address described above. Data). In other words, the effect control program is designed to read this model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the model is different. On the other hand, the production control program reads the page-unit model information data of each page corresponding to each model over the specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address described above. In other words, the effect control program is designed to read this model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the model is different.

As described above, in the state where the introduction page (hereinafter referred to as the “present page” at the present time point) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the effect control program sets a predetermined value on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 as shown in FIG. Upon detection of a contact state in which a direction, for example, from the lower left to the upper right is detected, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source has a book in the case of turning a page in the predetermined direction along the sliding contact state, for example, from left to right. Based on the page break information 4160 of the page, the page unit model information data is read from the next page start address 4160zc contained therein over a space of a specified unit capacity, and the page model information for the next one page to be displayed. Page drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "next page drawing data") is generated from the data, the next page drawing data is written in the frame buffer described above, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is synchronized with the V blank signal. Output to. Then, on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a page for explaining the outline of the entire game flow is displayed as the next page in the booklet information based on the next page drawing data as shown in FIG. 121. It

On the other hand, in the state where the page for explaining the outline of the entire game flow (referred to as the “present page” at the present time) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in this way, the effect control program causes the touch surface of the touch panel 246 to touch. When a contact state sliding in a predetermined direction, for example, from right to left is detected, the page break information of this page when the predetermined direction is turned along the sliding contact state in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a 4160z based on the previous page start address 4160zb contained therein, the page unit model information data is read out over the space of the specified unit capacity, and the page is sorted from the page model information data for one page to be displayed retroactively. Drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "previous page drawing data") is generated, the previous page drawing data is written in the above frame buffer, and is output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 in synchronization with the V blank signal. .. Then, on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the page representative of the model theme is displayed as the previous page of the booklet information based on the previous page drawing data.

[18-2. Automatic page display]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, since the player operates the firing handle with one hand to fire the game ball, the player must turn the page of the booklet only with the other hand. In many cases, the player proceeded to the next game before getting to the desired page in which the explanation corresponding to the progress of the game was described.

In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to display in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As described above, the booklet information including a plurality of pages is displayed, and then, a specific page corresponding to the progress of the game is automatically displayed from among the plurality of pages forming the booklet information.

In order to exert such a function, the model information data prepared in advance in the model information data area 4160bb of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b includes page break information 4160z for each page as shown in FIG. 67(B). Not only the next page start address and the previous page start address, but also the production type information corresponding to the description content of the present page is included as described above. As the performance type information, for example, with respect to page unit model information data used to display a page including commentary content regarding reach performance, the page break information 4160z located at the start address is "reach performance". The information shown can be mentioned.

To specifically exemplify, the production control program, for example, as an example of production conditions, a reach condition for executing the above-described reach production (a specific production operation) or a specific reach condition (production condition) among the reach conditions. The "reach effect" among the effect type information of the page break information 4160z of the plurality of page unit model information data constituting the model information data that is uniformly read as described above is triggered by the fact that the above is established (effect lottery means). The page-based model information data corresponding to is searched (model information data control means). That is, the production control program finds the page-unit model information data associated with the established reach condition among the plurality of page-unit model information data in the model information data used for displaying the plurality of pages described above.

Next, the effect control program generates drawing data from the page unit model information data and outputs it to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means), and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 displays a plurality of pages. As an example of the specific effect operation, as a specific page related to the reach effect, a comment page regarding the reach effect as shown in FIG. 122 is automatically displayed (page automatic display control means). Note that the specific page to be automatically displayed in this manner may be not only the reach effect as described above, but also other effect operations or other information.

In the present embodiment, basically, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that executes the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the reach effect is an example of the effect operation according to the progress of the game. When is executed, the explanation about the reach effect as the effect operation is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). Therefore, even a player who is playing on an unfamiliar pachinko gaming machine 1 can surely explain at an appropriate time a commentary corresponding to the progress of an unfamiliar game without impairing the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Since it becomes possible to refer to it, it becomes possible to enjoy the game while accurately grasping the original playability. At the same time, the player can fully enjoy the playability after understanding exactly the game specifications intended by the developer of the game machine along with the progress of the game.

[18-3. Standby character demonstration]
By the way, in general, recent game machines are equipped with a game board characterized according to the theme set for each model, and when a game is started, a movable accessory provided on the game board is very small. It rarely activates suddenly to surprise the player so that the player's interest is not exhausted (see the above-mentioned first reference). Even in a game machine including a movable decorative body 3250 on the game board as described above, it is general that the movable accessory is in a housed state, for example, during demonstration production. For this reason, the operation mode of the movable body is hard to imagine by a visitor who is searching for a desired pachinko gaming machine and patrols the aisle of the game hall. It was often difficult to get into the psychology of trying to get started.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, the effect control program receives the command (command) output by the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), and the game ball is accepted from the main control board 4100 to the starting opening 2101. The state (hereinafter referred to as the non-gaming state) in which the command indicating that (herein, the starting mouth prize command (starting mouth prize command) is received) has not been received continues for about 30 seconds (specified period). Then, this is detected (non-gaming state detecting means). The effect control program may be based on whether or not another command is received to detect the non-gaming state.

Next, the production control program executes the origin return program that executes the above-described origin return processing when such a non-gaming state continues for the above specified period (hereinafter, simply referred to as “origin”). "Return processing is executed"), and the movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) is operated in a prescribed operation mode (demonstration control means).

In this way, a visitor wandering around the aisle of the amusement hall, for example, without changing the control by using the existing return-to-origin process, can change the behavior mode of the movable actor characterizing the amusement property. Since they will have the opportunity to come into contact with them, before the game, they will experience the operating mode of the movable accessory characterized in this way, and under what circumstances such operating mode of the movable accessory is carried out in the actual game. Since it is possible to imagine various possibilities, it is possible to easily reach the psychology of trying to start a game.

Furthermore, the production control program turns on the power when a new start mouth winning command (start winning command) is received while the movable decorative body 3250 is operated in the prescribed operation mode in the above-described origin return processing. After interrupting the time processing, processing for moving the movable decorative body 3250 from the interrupted position to the specified storage position (hereinafter, also referred to as origin return processing after demonstration interruption) is executed (control means after demonstration interruption). ).

[18-4. Booklet touch to activate the accessory]
By the way, under the predetermined background described above, the player can understand the outline of the game specification on the surface by referring to the booklet, but for example, regarding the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250, Is difficult to grasp unless the game is actually started, and it is difficult to convey the playability using the movable decorative body 3250.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal and the sound are triggered by the detection of the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) of the touch unit 220B (hereinafter, referred to as “first prescribed contact state”). Based on the model information data uniformly read out from the model information data storage area 4160bb (regulated storage area) of the ROM 4160b (production control storage means), the touch plate 220B has a plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). , After displaying the information about the game viewed by the player as a substitute for the booklet, a specific content regarding the movable ornament 3250 is displayed as a part of the information about the game in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The above-mentioned display is triggered by the detection of a certain contact state (hereinafter referred to as the “second prescribed contact state”) in the contact surface portion of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position The movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) is operated with a behavior corresponding to the specific content.

Specifically, the effect control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb as described above (model information data control means), and a plurality of page unit model information data included in the read model information data. Of the specific page unit model information data, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data and outputs the drawing data to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As the page of (1), a page related to the notice effect as shown in FIG.

In this notice effect page, regarding the notice effect that uses a character called "Mighty-kun" as the bomb king, it is shown that, for example, the expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the color, and the behavior of the character is flat. It is represented by It is suggested that if the character is red, any one of four types of behaviors of "normal", "rolling", "rocket", and "monster" is selected and displayed on the notice production page. ing. The four types of icons indicating these behavior modes include the icon 246Z indicating the behavior of the "rolling".

In this way, the visitors of the amusement hall who come into contact with the notice effect page displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B are interested in the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250, for example, and are controlled by the effect control program. In the notice effect page (specific page) displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means), the icon 246Z visible through the operation surface of the touch panel 246 is touched.

Then, the effect control program displays an icon 246Z representing a specific behavior as a specific content related to the movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) as a part of the information regarding the game content in the notice effect page. The origin return process may be executed as described above when a specified contact state is detected on the contact surface portion of the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) corresponding to the existing position. Instead, for example, as a specific behavior intended by the displayed icon 246Z, a drive signal for rotating the movable decorative body 3250 in one direction is given to a motor (not shown), or the movable decorative body 3250 is changed to another. The motor (not shown) is repeatedly provided with a drive signal for rotating the movable decorative body 3250 in a predetermined direction, so that the movable decorative body 3250 is repeatedly rolled (hereinafter also referred to as “rolling mode”) (simulated operation control means). ..

In the present embodiment, the following method is adopted as a specific method for realizing the mode in which the rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 is repeated. First, the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores the various schedule data described above stores specific schedule data corresponding to the effect pattern to be operated in a manner in which the rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 is repeated.

The production control program is a production pattern to be operated from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, for example, in a mode in which rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 is repeated among a plurality of schedule data respectively corresponding to a plurality of production patterns (hereinafter referred to as “rolling mode”). The specific schedule data corresponding to is selected and read. The effect control program is triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state on the contact surface that covers the icon 246Z corresponding to the movable ornament 3250 as described above, in accordance with the selected specific schedule data. Although a motor (not shown) that drives the body 3250 is driven to perform effect control, at this time, another effect that drives an effect device (such as a speaker) other than the movable decorative object 3250 in the specific schedule data. Other schedule data used for control is masked (schedule masking means), and the specific accessory performance schedule data used for the remaining effect control is extracted.

The effect control program outputs a drive signal to the motor via a drive mechanism (not shown) in accordance with the specific accessory demonstration schedule data used for the remaining effect control. Then, the movable decorative body 3250 is operated by the action of a drive mechanism (not shown) in a manner of repeating rolling horizontally in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 125.

In this way, the visitors of the game hall can obtain the outline of the game specifications when the above-mentioned booklet cannot be obtained or when the booklet can be obtained. Even if it is difficult to grasp whether or not the game is actually started, the game player can start the game after experiencing the operation mode of the movable decorative body 3250.

[18-5. Background introduction]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specification to some extent by referring to the above-mentioned booklet, but if the player does not know the character itself that characterizes the game machine, especially the game specification is If it is related to the character, the game specification cannot be grasped in detail, and there is a possibility that the game may not be fully enjoyed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program, for example, when the special symbol is variably displayed, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 displays the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As described above, triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state in the contact surface portion of the touch panel 246 corresponding to the position where a specific character (specific display part) is displayed as a part of the information on the game, The information related to a specific character (specific display part) is provided based on the model information data.

By doing so, even if the player is not familiar with the character characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (corresponding to the above-mentioned "Might-kun"), the position of the character displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is dealt with. When a part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is touched with a finger, as the information related to this character, for example, in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, if the character appears in a certain work, As a background introduction, for example, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the family structure of the character in the original work is introduced, or at least one story of the original work whose theme is the character is introduced. By introducing the section, it becomes possible to gain some knowledge about the character. Here, a pachinko gaming machine having a specific character as a theme generally has a game specification associated with the specific character. Therefore, when the player has the opportunity to introduce the background as described above, even if the player is not familiar with the character that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can grasp the game specification relating to this character in more detail. This makes it easier to fully enjoy the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the effect control program is a part of the information regarding the game on the specific page displayed (by the specific page display control means) as described above in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). The specific page unit model is triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state on the contact surface portion of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position where the character (specific display portion) is displayed as Based on the background information data that is the data associated with the information data and is used to introduce the background introduction for the specific character (specific display part), the background introduction for the specific character is visually displayed on the specific page. Allow (specific information display control means).

In addition, as the information related to such a character, for example, a word explaining a story related to the character in the jackpot gaming state is displayed, or the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 owns its brand or It can be mentioned that the wording that appeals to your model is displayed.

On the other hand, the background introduction regarding such a character may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 instead of or in addition to being displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as described above. In this way, the player can concentrate on the game without overlooking the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, and at the same time, it becomes easy to grasp the game specifications related to the character that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 in detail.

On the other hand, the effect control program, instead of or in addition to visually displaying the background introduction related to the character on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 or the like as described above, the bass speaker of the speaker unit 920, a top for a high tone not shown. From the speaker, the left speaker of the left speaker unit 430, and the right speaker of the right speaker unit 246, or any combination thereof, with a hearing equivalent to the background introduction regarding the character described above, similar to a player or a visitor of a game hall. You may make it perceptually recognize the content of. That is, the production control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU4150a under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a triggered by displaying the background introduction regarding the specific character on the specific page (by the specific information display control means) as described above. Based on this background information data, the section 4160 is made to output the background introduction regarding the specific character auditorily (specific information sound output control means).

At this time, the effect control program further outputs the same content as above using a speaker having directivity among these speakers, so that the same content is provided only to a limited number of people such as a player. You may tell it.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, the above embodiment shows a case where it is mainly applied to a ball-type game machine (pachinko game machine), but the present invention is not limited to this. Can also be applied. Alternatively, this embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a pachi-slot gaming machine are integrated. In any of these cases, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the effects already described.

As a basic configuration of such a rotary game machine or a game machine formed by the fusion, for example, a rotating display body (rotating display means) including a plurality of reels (rotating bodies) to which a plurality of types of symbols are attached, A housing provided with the rotary display, an operation lever (first operating means) provided outside the housing, and a plurality of housings provided outside the housing corresponding to the plurality of reels. And a stop button (second operation means) of the game machine, the operation lever is operated (corresponding to the satisfaction of the start condition) to rotate the plurality of reels respectively, the plurality of stop Rotating body control means for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the operation order of the buttons, and an internal lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied when the starting lever is operated. Game control means having a lottery means for executing the above and a game state control means for shifting from a normal game state to a special game state advantageous to the player after the predetermined winning condition is satisfied (the above-mentioned (Almost equivalent to the function of the main control board 4100) and the effect control means for controlling the effect operation according to the satisfaction condition of the predetermined winning condition by the control of the game control means (almost equivalent to the function of the peripheral control board 4140 described above). Equivalent), display means for performing a display operation as a part of the effect operation by the effect control means (substantially equivalent to the function of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above), and by the control of the game control means, A payout device (payout means) for executing a payout operation of a game medium according to a combination mode of a plurality of symbols stopped in a symbol display area in which a variation mode of the plurality of symbols attached to the reel can be visually recognized, .

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine), 2... Outer frame, 3... Door frame, 4... Main body frame, 5... Game board, 4110... Payout control board (payout control means), 4100... Main control board (Game control means) ) 4140... Peripheral control board (production control means).

Claims (1)

A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
And a production control means for controlling a production device for displaying an image in accordance with an instruction from the game control means,
The effect control means,
A constant storage means in which material image data forming the display surface of the image is stored in advance,
Production control data selection means for selecting first production control data for controlling display of an image in accordance with an instruction from the game control means,
Temporary storage means for temporarily storing material image data for each display surface based on the first effect control data among the material image data.
Display surface image storage means for storing the material image data read from the constant storage means or the temporary storage means as image data to be displayed on the effect device,
The material image data stored in the temporary storage means is read out for one display surface in the order of display surface units stored previously, and stored in the display surface image storage means as image data to be displayed on the rendering device. Image display control means for outputting the image data stored in the storage means to the effect device;
Is read from the normally storage means raw image data of a predetermined display surface fraction, while allowing rearranged in the temporary storage means in a predetermined arrangement manner, the relocated material image on the first performance control data and the temporary storage means Reconstructing means for constructing the second effect control data based on the arrangement of the data,
Equipped with
The image display control means stores image data to be displayed on the effect device in the display surface image storage means based on the second effect control data constructed by the reconstruction means, and the display surface image storage means. A game machine characterized in that the image data is output to the effect device in units of the following display surfaces that store image data to be displayed on the effect device.